]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git/blame - ld/ld.texinfo
Update year range in copyright notice of binutils files
[thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
219d1afa 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15 36@set Renesas
b4cbbe8f 37@set S/390
49fa1e15
AM
38@set SPU
39@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 40@set WIN32
e0001a05 41@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
42@end ifset
43@c man end
44
9160ea82
AM
45@ifnottex
46@dircategory Software development
47@direntry
252b5132 48* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
49@end direntry
50@end ifnottex
252b5132 51
0e9517a9 52@copying
e49e529d
JM
53This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
54@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
55@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
56@end ifset
57version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 58
219d1afa 59Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 60
cf055d54 61Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 62under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
63or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
64with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
65Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 66section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 67@end copying
252b5132
RH
68@iftex
69@finalout
70@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 71@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 72@titlepage
71ba23f6 73@title The GNU linker
252b5132 74@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
75@subtitle @code{ld}
76@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
77@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
78@end ifset
252b5132
RH
79@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
80@author Steve Chamberlain
81@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
82@page
83
84@tex
85{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
86\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
87\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 88\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
89\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
90}
91\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
92@end tex
93
94@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 95@c man begin COPYRIGHT
219d1afa 96Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 97
0285c67d 98Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 99under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
100or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 103section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 104@c man end
252b5132 105
252b5132
RH
106@end titlepage
107@end iftex
4ecceb71 108@contents
252b5132
RH
109@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
84ec0e6d 111@ifnottex
252b5132 112@node Top
71ba23f6 113@top LD
e49e529d
JM
114This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117@end ifset
118version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 119
cf055d54 120This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
121Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 123
252b5132
RH
124@menu
125* Overview:: Overview
126* Invocation:: Invocation
127* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128@ifset GENERIC
129* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130@end ifset
131@ifclear GENERIC
132@ifset H8300
133* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
135@ifset Renesas
136* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
137@end ifset
138@ifset I960
139* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
140@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
141@ifset ARM
142* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
143@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
144@ifset M68HC11
145* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
146@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
147@ifset HPPA
148* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
149@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
150@ifset M68K
151* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
152@end ifset
833794fc
MR
153@ifset MIPS
154* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
155@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
156@ifset POWERPC
157* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
158@end ifset
159@ifset POWERPC64
160* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
161@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
162@ifset S/390
163* S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
164@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
165@ifset SPU
166* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
167@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
168@ifset TICOFF
169* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
170@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
171@ifset WIN32
172* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
173@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
174@ifset XTENSA
175* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
176@end ifset
252b5132
RH
177@end ifclear
178@ifclear SingleFormat
179* BFD:: BFD
180@end ifclear
181@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
182
183* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
184* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 185* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 186* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 187@end menu
84ec0e6d 188@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
189
190@node Overview
191@chapter Overview
192
193@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
194@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 195
0879a67a 196@ifset man
0285c67d 197@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 198ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
199@c man end
200
201@c man begin SEEALSO
202ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
203the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
204@file{ld}.
205@c man end
206@end ifset
207
208@c man begin DESCRIPTION
209
ff5dcc92 210@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 211their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 212compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 213
ff5dcc92 214@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
215a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
216to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
217
0285c67d
NC
218@ifset man
219@c For the man only
ece2d90e 220This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
221@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
222language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
223@end ifset
224
252b5132 225@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
226This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
227to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
228write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
229@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
230available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
231@end ifclear
232
233Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
234linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
235execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 236@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
237(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
238
0285c67d
NC
239@c man end
240
252b5132
RH
241@node Invocation
242@chapter Invocation
243
0285c67d
NC
244@c man begin DESCRIPTION
245
ff5dcc92 246The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
247and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
248you have many choices to control its behavior.
249
0285c67d
NC
250@c man end
251
252b5132
RH
252@ifset UsesEnvVars
253@menu
254* Options:: Command Line Options
255* Environment:: Environment Variables
256@end menu
257
258@node Options
259@section Command Line Options
260@end ifset
261
262@cindex command line
263@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
264
265@c man begin OPTIONS
266
252b5132
RH
267The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
268practice few of them are used in any particular context.
269@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 270For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
271object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
272link a file @code{hello.o}:
273
274@smallexample
275ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
276@end smallexample
277
ff5dcc92 278This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
279result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
280the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
281directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
282
ff5dcc92 283Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
284point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
285as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
286which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
287files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
288different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
289occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
290option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
291noted in the descriptions below.
292
293@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
294Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
295together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
296options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
297an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
298
299Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
300specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
301and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
302are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
303message @samp{No input files}.
304
36f63dca 305If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
306assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
307augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
308linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
309permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
310or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
311@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
312script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
313extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
314to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
315the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
316
317For options whose names are a single letter,
318option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
319whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
320option that requires them.
321
322For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 323precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 324@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 325this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 326only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
327@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
328name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
329output.
330
331Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
332option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
333immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
334@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
335Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
336accepted.
252b5132 337
36f63dca
NC
338Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
339(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
340prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
341compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
342
343@smallexample
2509a395 344 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
345@end smallexample
346
347This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
348silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
349may also arise when passing options that require values through a
350driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
351a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
352and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
353the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
354
355@smallexample
356 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
357@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
358
359Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
360linker:
361
ff5dcc92 362@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 363@include at-file.texi
dff70155 364
2509a395
SL
365@kindex -a @var{keyword}
366@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
367This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
368argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
369@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
370@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
371to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
372
7ee314fa
AM
373@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
374@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
375Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
376@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
377specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
378will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
379finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 380it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 381This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 382interface.
7ee314fa 383
252b5132
RH
384@ifset I960
385@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
386@kindex -A @var{arch}
387@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
388@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
389@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
390In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
391Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
392@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
393the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 394archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
395family}, for details.
396
ff5dcc92 397Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
398other architecture families.
399@end ifset
400
401@ifclear SingleFormat
402@cindex binary input format
403@kindex -b @var{format}
404@kindex --format=@var{format}
405@cindex input format
406@cindex input format
407@item -b @var{input-format}
408@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
409@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
410file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 411@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 412that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 413configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 414to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
415default input format the most usual format on each machine.
416@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
417supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
418formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
419@xref{BFD}.
420
421You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
422binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
423linking object files of different formats), by including
424@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 425particular format.
252b5132
RH
426
427The default format is taken from the environment variable
428@code{GNUTARGET}.
429@ifset UsesEnvVars
430@xref{Environment}.
431@end ifset
432You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
433@code{TARGET};
434@ifclear man
435see @ref{Format Commands}.
436@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
437@end ifclear
438
439@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
440@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
441@cindex compatibility, MRI
442@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
443@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 444For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 445files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
446@ifclear man
447@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
448@end ifclear
449@ifset man
450the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
451@end ifset
452Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 453the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
454scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
455If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
456specified by any @samp{-L} options.
457
458@cindex common allocation
459@kindex -d
460@kindex -dc
461@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 462@item -d
252b5132
RH
463@itemx -dc
464@itemx -dp
465These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
466compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
467even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
468script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
469@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
470
7ee314fa
AM
471@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
472@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
473@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
474@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
475Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
476@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
477specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
478will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
479option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 480The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 481
252b5132
RH
482@cindex entry point, from command line
483@kindex -e @var{entry}
484@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 485@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
486@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
487Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
488program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
489named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
490and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
491base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
492@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
493and other ways of specifying the entry point.
494
b58f81ae
DJ
495@kindex --exclude-libs
496@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
497Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 498exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
499@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
500automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
501port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
502explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
503option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
504be treated as hidden.
505
e1c37eb5
DK
506@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
507@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
508Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
509should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
510into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
511may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
512used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
513the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
514match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
515command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
516of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
517regardless of this option.
518
252b5132
RH
519@cindex dynamic symbol table
520@kindex -E
521@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 522@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
523@item -E
524@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
525@itemx --no-export-dynamic
526When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
527option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
528all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
529set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
530
531If you do not use either of these options (or use the
532@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
533dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
534referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
535
536If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
537back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
538dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
539linking the program itself.
540
55255dae 541You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 542be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 543See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 544
8b747e1a
DK
545Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
546support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
547the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
548
36f63dca 549@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
550@cindex big-endian objects
551@cindex endianness
552@kindex -EB
553@item -EB
554Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
555
556@cindex little-endian objects
557@kindex -EL
558@item -EL
559Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 560@end ifclear
252b5132 561
2509a395
SL
562@kindex -f @var{name}
563@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
564@item -f @var{name}
565@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
566When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
567to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
568table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
569symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
570
571If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
572run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
573the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
574first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
575@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
576in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
577Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
578implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
579machine specific performance.
580
581This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
582will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
583
2509a395
SL
584@kindex -F @var{name}
585@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 586@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 587@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
588When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
589the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
590of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
591on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
592
593If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
594run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
595dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
596filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
597found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
598used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
599@var{name}.
600
ff5dcc92 601Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 602toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
603object files.
604@ifclear SingleFormat
605The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 606@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 607@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
608environment variable.
609@end ifclear
610The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
611creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 612
3dbf70a2 613@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
614@kindex -fini=@var{name}
615@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
616When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
617executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
618address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
619the function to call.
620
252b5132
RH
621@kindex -g
622@item -g
623Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
624
2509a395
SL
625@kindex -G @var{value}
626@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 627@cindex object size
2509a395 628@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
629@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
630Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
631@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 632MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
633sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
634
635@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 636@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 637@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 638@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
639@itemx -soname=@var{name}
640When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
641the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
642which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
643linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
644field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
645
646@kindex -i
647@cindex incremental link
648@item -i
649Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
650
3dbf70a2 651@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
652@kindex -init=@var{name}
653@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
654When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
655executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
656of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
657function to call.
658
252b5132 659@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 660@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 661@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 662@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
663@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
664Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
665list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
666If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 667will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 668will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 669
ff5dcc92 670On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
671files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
672and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
673called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
674@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
675indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
676to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
677@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
678
679The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
680specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
681was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
682command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
683archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
684the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
685
ff5dcc92 686See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
687archives multiple times.
688
689You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
690
691@ifset GENERIC
692This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 693if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
694behaviour of the AIX linker.
695@end ifset
696
697@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 698@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 699@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 700@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 701@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
702Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
703for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
704option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
705in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
706on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 707@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
708order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
709how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
710option is specified.
252b5132 711
3aa2d05a
NC
712If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
713prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
714@samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 715
252b5132
RH
716@ifset UsesEnvVars
717The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 718@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
719some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
720@end ifset
721
722The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
723@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
724at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
725
726@cindex emulation
727@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 728@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
729Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
730emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
731
732If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
733@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
734
735Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
736configured.
737
738@cindex link map
739@kindex -M
740@kindex --print-map
741@item -M
742@itemx --print-map
743Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
744information about the link, including the following:
745
746@itemize @bullet
747@item
3b83e13a 748Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
749@item
750How common symbols are allocated.
751@item
752All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
753which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
754@item
755The values assigned to symbols.
756
757Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
758involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
759have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
760linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
761of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
762the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
763linker script containing:
764
765@smallexample
766 foo = 1
767 foo = foo * 4
768 foo = foo + 8
769@end smallexample
770
771will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
772option is used:
773
774@smallexample
775 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
776 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
777 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
778@end smallexample
779
780See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
781scripts.
252b5132
RH
782@end itemize
783
784@kindex -n
785@cindex read-only text
786@cindex NMAGIC
787@kindex --nmagic
788@item -n
789@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
790Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
791libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
792mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
793
794@kindex -N
795@kindex --omagic
796@cindex read/write from cmd line
797@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 798@item -N
252b5132
RH
799@itemx --omagic
800Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
801not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
802libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
803mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
804is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
805specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
806
807@kindex --no-omagic
808@cindex OMAGIC
809@item --no-omagic
810This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
811sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
812be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
813shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
814
815@kindex -o @var{output}
816@kindex --output=@var{output}
817@cindex naming the output file
818@item -o @var{output}
819@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 820Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
821option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
822script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
823
824@kindex -O @var{level}
825@cindex generating optimized output
826@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 827If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 828the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
829should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
830option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
831the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
832no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
833of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 834
387dd777
DP
835@kindex -plugin @var{name}
836@item -plugin @var{name}
837Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
838the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
839automatically added by the complier, when using link time
840optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
841wish.
842
843Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
844from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
845@command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
846those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
847copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
848based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
6c19b93b 849just copy in the newest one.
387dd777 850
26278bb8
UD
851@kindex --push-state
852@cindex push state governing input file handling
853@item --push-state
854The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
855flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
856restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
857
858The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
859@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
860@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
861@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
862@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
863@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
864
865One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
866used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
867listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
868something as follows:
869
870@smallexample
871-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
872@end smallexample
873
874@kindex --pop-state
875@cindex pop state governing input file handling
67cecaba 876@item --pop-state
26278bb8
UD
877Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
878flags governing input file handling.
879
a712da20
NC
880@kindex -q
881@kindex --emit-relocs
882@cindex retain relocations in final executable
883@item -q
884@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 885Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
886Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
887order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
888in larger executables.
889
dbab7a7b
NC
890This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
891
4f471f39
RS
892@kindex --force-dynamic
893@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
894@item --force-dynamic
895Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
896to VxWorks targets.
897
252b5132
RH
898@cindex partial link
899@cindex relocatable output
900@kindex -r
1049f94e 901@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 902@item -r
1049f94e 903@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 904Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 905turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
906linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
907magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
908@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 909@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
910If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
911linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
912constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
913
62bf86b4
HPN
914When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
915partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
916relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
917example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
918with input files in other formats at all.
919
252b5132
RH
920This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
921
922@kindex -R @var{file}
923@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
924@cindex symbol-only input
925@item -R @var{filename}
926@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
927Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
928relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
929to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
930programs. You may use this option more than once.
931
ff5dcc92 932For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 933followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 934the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
935
936@kindex -s
937@kindex --strip-all
938@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 939@item -s
252b5132
RH
940@itemx --strip-all
941Omit all symbol information from the output file.
942
943@kindex -S
944@kindex --strip-debug
945@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 946@item -S
252b5132
RH
947@itemx --strip-debug
948Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
949
a70f34c0
NC
950@kindex --strip-discarded
951@kindex --no-strip-discarded
952@item --strip-discarded
953@itemx --no-strip-discarded
954Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
955Enabled by default.
956
252b5132
RH
957@kindex -t
958@kindex --trace
959@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 960@item -t
252b5132 961@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 962Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
963
964@kindex -T @var{script}
965@kindex --script=@var{script}
966@cindex script files
967@item -T @var{scriptfile}
968@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
969Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 970@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 971@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
972output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
973the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
974specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
975options accumulate.
252b5132 976
14be8564
L
977@kindex -dT @var{script}
978@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
979@cindex script files
980@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
981@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
982Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
983
984This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
985processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
986command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
987@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
988behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
989command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
990the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
991@samp{gcc}).
992
252b5132
RH
993@kindex -u @var{symbol}
994@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
995@cindex undefined symbol
996@item -u @var{symbol}
997@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
998Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
999symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
1000modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
1001different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
1002option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
1003
0a618243
AB
1004If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1005into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1006undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1007instead.
1008
1009@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1010@cindex symbols, require defined
1011@cindex defined symbol
1012@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1013Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1014is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1015is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1016and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1017@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1018can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1019
252b5132
RH
1020@kindex -Ur
1021@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 1022@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
1023For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1024@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 1025turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
1026@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1027It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1028with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1029be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1030@samp{-r} for the others.
1031
c005eb9e
AB
1032@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1033@cindex orphan sections
1034@cindex sections, orphan
1035@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1036Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1037specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1038
1039@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1040
1041@table @code
1042@item place
1043Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1044the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
d2732b69 1045@samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
c005eb9e
AB
1046
1047@item discard
1048All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1049@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1050
1051@item warn
1052The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1053issue a warning.
1054
1055@item error
1056The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1057@end table
1058
1059The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1060
577a0623
AM
1061@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1062@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1063Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1064@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1065missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1066specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1067multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1068input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1069in a linker script.
a854a4a7 1070
252b5132
RH
1071@kindex -v
1072@kindex -V
1073@kindex --version
1074@cindex version
1075@item -v
1076@itemx --version
1077@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1078Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1079lists the supported emulations.
1080
1081@kindex -x
1082@kindex --discard-all
1083@cindex deleting local symbols
1084@item -x
1085@itemx --discard-all
1086Delete all local symbols.
1087
1088@kindex -X
1089@kindex --discard-locals
1090@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1091@item -X
252b5132 1092@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1093Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1094system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1095or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1096
1097@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1098@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1099@cindex symbol tracing
1100@item -y @var{symbol}
1101@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1102Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1103option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1104to prepend an underscore.
1105
1106This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1107don't know where the reference is coming from.
1108
1109@kindex -Y @var{path}
1110@item -Y @var{path}
1111Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1112for Solaris compatibility.
1113
1114@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1115@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1116The recognized keywords are:
1117@table @samp
1118
e6e2dfbd
AM
1119@item bndplt
1120Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1121
1122@item call-nop=prefix-addr
1123@itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1124@itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1125@itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1126Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1127to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1128@option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1129@option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1130@option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1131@option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1132Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1133
cd6d6c15 1134@item combreloc
e6e2dfbd
AM
1135@itemx nocombreloc
1136Combine multiple dynamic relocation sections and sort to improve
1137dynamic symbol lookup caching. Do not do this if @samp{nocombreloc}.
cd6d6c15 1138
b8871f35 1139@item common
e6e2dfbd
AM
1140@itemx nocommon
1141Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type during a relocatable
1142link. Use STT_OBJECT type if @samp{nocommon}.
1143
1144@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1145Set the page size most commonly used to @var{value}. Memory image
1146layout will be optimized to minimize memory pages if the system is
1147using pages of this size.
b8871f35 1148
cd6d6c15 1149@item defs
560e09e9 1150Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1151shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1152
e6e2dfbd
AM
1153@item dynamic-undefined-weak
1154@itemx nodynamic-undefined-weak
1155Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1156if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1157by symbol visibility or versioning. Do not make them dynamic if
1158@samp{nodynamic-undefined-weak}. If neither option is given, a target
1159may default to either option being in force, or make some other
1160selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic. Not all targets support
1161these options.
1162
6aa29e7b
JJ
1163@item execstack
1164Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1165
b039ef04
L
1166@item global
1167This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1168the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1169of subsequently loaded libraries.
1170
93ab9c0d
NC
1171@item globalaudit
1172This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
1173This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
1174setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
1175tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
1176the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command line options be run for
6c19b93b 1177all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
93ab9c0d 1178
e6e2dfbd
AM
1179@item ibtplt
1180Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1181Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1182
8df93cb5 1183@item ibt
e6e2dfbd
AM
1184Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1185to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1186Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1187
cd6d6c15
NC
1188@item initfirst
1189This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1190It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1191before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1192the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1193the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1194objects.
1195
1196@item interpose
e6e2dfbd
AM
1197Specify that the dynamic loader should modify its symbol search order
1198so that symbols in this shared library interpose all other shared
1199libraries not so marked.
cd6d6c15 1200
5fa222e4
AM
1201@item lazy
1202When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1203dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1204the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1205Lazy binding is the default.
1206
cd6d6c15 1207@item loadfltr
e6e2dfbd 1208Specify that the object's filters be processed immediately at runtime.
cd6d6c15 1209
e6e2dfbd
AM
1210@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1211Set the maximum memory page size supported to @var{value}.
cd6d6c15 1212
e6e2dfbd
AM
1213@item muldefs
1214Allow multiple definitions.
b8871f35 1215
cd6d6c15 1216@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1217Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1218defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1219
1220@item nodefaultlib
e6e2dfbd
AM
1221Specify that the dynamic loader search for dependencies of this object
1222should ignore any default library search paths.
cd6d6c15
NC
1223
1224@item nodelete
e6e2dfbd 1225Specify that the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
cd6d6c15
NC
1226
1227@item nodlopen
e6e2dfbd 1228Specify that the object is not available to @code{dlopen}.
cd6d6c15
NC
1229
1230@item nodump
e6e2dfbd 1231Specify that the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
cd6d6c15 1232
6aa29e7b
JJ
1233@item noexecstack
1234Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1235
e6e2dfbd
AM
1236@item noextern-protected-data
1237Don't treat protected data symbols as external when building a shared
1238library. This option overrides the linker backend default. It can be
1239used to work around incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1240generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1241module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1242i386 and x86-64.
8dfef1bd 1243
e6e2dfbd
AM
1244@item noreloc-overflow
1245Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1246relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1247overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
6aa29e7b 1248
cd6d6c15
NC
1249@item now
1250When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1251dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
e6e2dfbd
AM
1252when the shared library is loaded by dlopen, instead of deferring
1253function call resolution to the point when the function is first
1254called.
cd6d6c15
NC
1255
1256@item origin
e6e2dfbd 1257Specify that the object requires @samp{$ORIGIN} handling in paths.
cd6d6c15 1258
6aa29e7b 1259@item relro
e6e2dfbd 1260@itemx norelro
def5c83c
AM
1261Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object. This
1262specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only after
1263relocation, if supported. Specifying @samp{common-page-size} smaller
1264than the system page size will render this protection ineffective.
e6e2dfbd 1265Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment if @samp{norelro}.
6aa29e7b 1266
e6e2dfbd
AM
1267@item shstk
1268Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1269to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1270Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
24718e3b 1271
04c3a755 1272@item stack-size=@var{value}
e6e2dfbd 1273Specify a stack size for an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
04c3a755
NS
1274Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1275@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1276
e6e2dfbd
AM
1277@item text
1278@itemx notext
1279@itemx textoff
1280Report an error if DT_TEXTREL is set, i.e., if the binary has dynamic
1281relocations in read-only sections. Don't report an error if
1282@samp{notext} or @samp{textoff}.
48580982 1283
cd6d6c15
NC
1284@end table
1285
ece2d90e 1286Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1287
1288@kindex -(
1289@cindex groups of archives
1290@item -( @var{archives} -)
1291@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1292The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1293either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1294
1295The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1296references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1297the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1298archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1299object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1300would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1301they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1302resolved.
1303
1304Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1305it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1306more archives.
1307
69da35b5
NC
1308@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1309@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1310@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1311@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1312Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1313recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1314and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1315the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1316behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1317so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1318restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1319
4a43e768
AM
1320@kindex --as-needed
1321@kindex --no-as-needed
1322@item --as-needed
1323@itemx --no-as-needed
1324This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1325on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1326the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1327on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1328needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1329emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1330non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1331the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1332non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1333Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1334the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1335needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1336from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1337
e56f61be
L
1338@kindex --add-needed
1339@kindex --no-add-needed
1340@item --add-needed
1341@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1342These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1343their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1344options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1345and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1346
252b5132
RH
1347@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1348@item -assert @var{keyword}
1349This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1350
1351@kindex -Bdynamic
1352@kindex -dy
1353@kindex -call_shared
1354@item -Bdynamic
1355@itemx -dy
1356@itemx -call_shared
1357Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1358for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1359default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1360for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1361multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1362@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1363
a1ab1d2a
UD
1364@kindex -Bgroup
1365@item -Bgroup
1366Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1367section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1368object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1369@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1370only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1371
252b5132
RH
1372@kindex -Bstatic
1373@kindex -dn
1374@kindex -non_shared
1375@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1376@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1377@itemx -dn
1378@itemx -non_shared
1379@itemx -static
1380Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1381platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1382variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1383may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1384library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1385option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1386option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1387shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1388references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1389libraries.
252b5132
RH
1390
1391@kindex -Bsymbolic
1392@item -Bsymbolic
1393When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1394definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1395for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
e20365c5
L
1396within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1397@option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1398executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1399the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1400support shared libraries and position independent executables.
252b5132 1401
40b36307
L
1402@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1403@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1404When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1405symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
e20365c5
L
1406This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1407when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1408to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
40b36307 1409This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
e20365c5 1410libraries and position independent executables.
40b36307 1411
55255dae
L
1412@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1413@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1414Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1415typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1416global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1417within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1418to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1419in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1420which support shared libraries.
1421
1422The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1423scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1424
40b36307
L
1425@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1426@item --dynamic-list-data
1427Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1428
1429@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1430@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1431Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1432is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1433
0b8a70d9
L
1434@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1435@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1436Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1437
252b5132
RH
1438@kindex --check-sections
1439@kindex --no-check-sections
1440@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1441@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1442Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1443been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1444perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1445suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1446allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1447restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1448Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1449force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1450option.
252b5132 1451
ddbb8a31
NC
1452@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1453@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1454@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1455@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1456This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1457by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1458command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1459output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1460input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1461specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1462follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1463behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1464
1465This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1466libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1467mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1468their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1469required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1470the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1471dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1472symbols.
1473
252b5132
RH
1474@cindex cross reference table
1475@kindex --cref
1476@item --cref
1477Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1478generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1479Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1480
1481The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1482easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1483sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1484symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1485definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1486where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1487symbol are listed.
252b5132 1488
4818e05f
AM
1489@cindex common allocation
1490@kindex --no-define-common
1491@item --no-define-common
1492This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1493The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1494@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1495
1496The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1497the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1498of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1499forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1500Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1501from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1502This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1503and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1504duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1505paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1506
7bdf4127
AB
1507@cindex group allocation in linker script
1508@cindex section groups
1509@cindex COMDAT
1510@kindex --force-group-allocation
1511@item --force-group-allocation
1512This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1513normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1514default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1515change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1516command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1517effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1518
252b5132 1519@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1520@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1521@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1522Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1523address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1524times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1525limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1526context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1527symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1528constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1529using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1530@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1531equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1532
1533@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1534@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1535@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1536@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1537@itemx --no-demangle
1538These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1539and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1540present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1541underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1542mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1543different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1544to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1545demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1546is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1547
1548@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1549@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1550@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1551@item -I@var{file}
1552@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1553Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1554generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1555linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1556doing.
1557
9b8b325a
RF
1558@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1559@item --no-dynamic-linker
1560When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1561linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1562executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1563entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1564
a70f34c0
NC
1565@kindex --embedded-relocs
1566@item --embedded-relocs
1567This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
1568that the relocs are stored in a target specific section. This option
1569is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1570targets.
1571
7ce691ae 1572@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1573@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1574@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1575@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1576Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1577with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1578
252b5132
RH
1579@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1580@item --force-exe-suffix
1581Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1582
1583If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1584@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1585the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1586option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1587Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1588it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1589
1590@kindex --gc-sections
1591@kindex --no-gc-sections
1592@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1593@item --gc-sections
1594@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1595Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1596targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1597performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1598@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1599collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1600implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1601
d5465ba2
AM
1602@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1603examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1604symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1605command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1606referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1607libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1608referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1609the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1610relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1611
ac69cbc6 1612This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1613@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1614specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1615a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1616
c17d87de
NC
1617@kindex --print-gc-sections
1618@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1619@cindex garbage collection
1620@item --print-gc-sections
1621@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1622List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1623printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1624collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1625default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1626be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1627line.
1628
22185505 1629@kindex --gc-keep-exported
1630@cindex garbage collection
1631@item --gc-keep-exported
1632When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1633collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1634default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1635executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1636collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1637Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1638it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1639ELF format targets.
1640
30824704
RM
1641@kindex --print-output-format
1642@cindex output format
1643@item --print-output-format
1644Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1645other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1646in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1647
3604cb1f
TG
1648@kindex --print-memory-usage
1649@cindex memory usage
1650@item --print-memory-usage
1651Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1652the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1653quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1654headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1655parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1656
1657@smallexample
1658Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1659 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1660 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1661@end smallexample
1662
252b5132
RH
1663@cindex help
1664@cindex usage
1665@kindex --help
1666@item --help
1667Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1668
ea20a7da
CC
1669@kindex --target-help
1670@item --target-help
1671Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1672
2509a395
SL
1673@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1674@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1675Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1676@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1677
1678@cindex memory usage
1679@kindex --no-keep-memory
1680@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1681@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1682symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1683instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1684necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1685while linking a large executable.
1686
1687@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1688@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1689@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1690@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1691Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1692is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1693The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1694behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1695libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1696
aa713662
L
1697@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1698@kindex -z muldefs
1699@item --allow-multiple-definition
1700@itemx -z muldefs
1701Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1702report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1703first definition will be used.
1704
b79e8c78 1705@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1706@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1707@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1708@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1709Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1710This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1711determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1712shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1713how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1714
903249d7
NC
1715The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1716referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1717an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1718a shared library.
1719
1720The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1721libraries specified at link time are that:
1722
1723@itemize @bullet
1724@item
1725A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1726that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1727resolvable at load time.
1728@item
1729There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1730symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1731
1732The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1733select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1734architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1735appropriate memset function.
1736@end itemize
b79e8c78 1737
31941635
L
1738@kindex --no-undefined-version
1739@item --no-undefined-version
1740Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1741it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1742will be issued instead.
1743
3e3b46e5
PB
1744@kindex --default-symver
1745@item --default-symver
1746Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1747exported symbols.
1748
1749@kindex --default-imported-symver
1750@item --default-imported-symver
1751Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1752imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1753
252b5132
RH
1754@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1755@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1756Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1757files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1758been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1759This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1760errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1761have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1762inappropriate.
1763
fe7929ce
AM
1764@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1765@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1766Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1767library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1768
252b5132
RH
1769@kindex --no-whole-archive
1770@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1771Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1772archive files.
1773
1774@cindex output file after errors
1775@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1776@item --noinhibit-exec
1777Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1778Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1779errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1780when it issues any error whatsoever.
1781
0a9c1c8e
CD
1782@kindex -nostdlib
1783@item -nostdlib
1784Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1785command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1786(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1787
252b5132 1788@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1789@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1790@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1791@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1792file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1793@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1794object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1795object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1796should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1797usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1798name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1799list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1800command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1801this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1802@end ifclear
1803
76359541
TP
1804@kindex --out-implib
1805@item --out-implib @var{file}
1806Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1807the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1808library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1809may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1810behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1811step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1812the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1813
36af4a4e
JJ
1814@kindex -pie
1815@kindex --pic-executable
1816@item -pie
1817@itemx --pic-executable
1818@cindex position independent executables
1819Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1820ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1821libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1822address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1823normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1824defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1825
252b5132
RH
1826@kindex -qmagic
1827@item -qmagic
1828This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1829
1830@kindex -Qy
1831@item -Qy
1832This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1833
1834@kindex --relax
1835@cindex synthesizing linker
1836@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1837@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1838@item --relax
28d5f677 1839@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1840An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1841@ifset GENERIC
1842This option is only supported on a few targets.
1843@end ifset
1844@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1845@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1846@end ifset
1847@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1848@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1849@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1850@ifset XTENSA
1851@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1852@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1853@ifset M68HC11
1854@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1855@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1856@ifset NIOSII
1857@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1858@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1859@ifset POWERPC
1860@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1861@end ifset
252b5132 1862
28d5f677
NC
1863On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1864global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1865addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1866synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1867instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1868
1869On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1870debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1871@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1872This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1873family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1874@end ifset
1875
1876@ifset GENERIC
1877On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1878but ignored.
1879@end ifset
1880
28d5f677
NC
1881On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1882@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1883
252b5132
RH
1884@cindex retaining specified symbols
1885@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1886@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1887@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1888@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1889Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1890discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1891symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1892@ifset GENERIC
1893(such as VxWorks)
1894@end ifset
1895where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1896run-time memory.
1897
1898@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1899or symbols needed for relocations.
1900
1901You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1902line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1903
1904@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1905@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1906@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1907@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1908Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1909linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1910arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1911them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1912also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1913objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1914@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1915ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1916@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1917
ff5dcc92 1918The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
d8506323 1919SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1920@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1921runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1922options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1923gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1924file systems.
252b5132 1925
ff5dcc92 1926For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1927followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1928the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1929@end ifset
1930
1931@ifset GENERIC
1932@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1933@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1934@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1935When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1936happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1937of the input files.
1938
1939When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1940non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1941shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1942explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1943specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1944@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1945either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1946appearing multiple times.
1947
e680a6b6
NC
1948The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1949directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1950containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
1951and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
195264-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
1953
1954The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
1955@var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
1956supported.
1957
28c309a2
NC
1958This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1959that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1960is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1961runtime linker would do.
1962
252b5132 1963The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1964libraries:
252b5132
RH
1965@enumerate
1966@item
ff5dcc92 1967Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1968@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1969Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1970between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1971specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1972used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1973at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1974by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1975the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1976@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1977On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1978@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1979environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1980@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1981On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1982directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1983@item
a1b8d843 1984For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1985variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1986@item
ec4eb78a
L
1987For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1988@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1989libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1990@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1991@item
252b5132
RH
1992The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1993@item
1994For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1995exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1996@end enumerate
1997
1998If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1999warning and continue with the link.
2000@end ifset
2001
2002@kindex -shared
2003@kindex -Bshareable
2004@item -shared
2005@itemx -Bshareable
2006@cindex shared libraries
2007Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2008and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 2009shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
2010undefined symbols in the link.
2011
252b5132 2012@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
2013@item --sort-common
2014@itemx --sort-common=ascending
2015@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
2016This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2017ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2018sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2019eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2020between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2021specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 2022
2509a395
SL
2023@kindex --sort-section=name
2024@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
2025This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2026patterns in the linker script.
2027
2509a395
SL
2028@kindex --sort-section=alignment
2029@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
2030This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2031patterns in the linker script.
2032
a70f34c0
NC
2033@kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2034@item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2035This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2036.dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2037post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2038
252b5132 2039@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 2040@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 2041Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
2042each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2043size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
2044
2045@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 2046@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 2047Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 2048output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 2049This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
2050certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2051cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2052that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2053support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2054input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2055more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 2056many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
2057
2058@kindex --stats
2059@item --stats
2060Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2061as execution time and memory usage.
2062
2509a395 2063@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
2064@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2065Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2066configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2067that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2068
a70f34c0
NC
2069@kindex --task-link
2070@item --task-link
2071This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2072file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2073
252b5132
RH
2074@kindex --traditional-format
2075@cindex traditional format
2076@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
2077For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2078the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
2079use the traditional format instead.
2080
2081@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 2082For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
2083symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2084full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2085@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 2086trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
2087combine duplicate entries.
2088
2509a395
SL
2089@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2090@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
2091Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2092address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2093times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2094line.
2095@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2096for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2097@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2098should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2099sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2100
2509a395
SL
2101@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2102@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2103@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 2104@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
2105@item -Tbss=@var{org}
2106@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2107@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2108Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 2109@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 2110
2509a395
SL
2111@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2112@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 2113@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
2114When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2115byte of the text segment.
258795f5 2116
9d5777a3
RM
2117@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2118@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2119@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2120When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2121the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2122text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2123
0d705e9f
AM
2124@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2125@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2126@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2127When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2128model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2129
560e09e9
NC
2130@kindex --unresolved-symbols
2131@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2132Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2133values for @samp{method}:
2134
2135@table @samp
2136@item ignore-all
da8bce14 2137Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
2138
2139@item report-all
da8bce14 2140Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
2141
2142@item ignore-in-object-files
2143Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2144ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2145
2146@item ignore-in-shared-libs
2147Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2148ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2149when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2150libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2151command line.
2152@end table
2153
2154The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2155by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2156
2157Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2158unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2159can change this to a warning.
2160
1715a13c
L
2161@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2162@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 2163@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 2164@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 2165Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 2166supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
2167the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2168argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
2169
2170@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2171@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 2172@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
2173Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2174used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 2175about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
2176is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2177see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2178use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2179symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2180@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 2181
7ce691ae 2182@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
2183@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2184@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2185@item --warn-common
2186Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 2187a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
2188but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2189you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 2190Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
2191warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2192
2193There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2194
2195@table @samp
2196@item int i = 1;
2197A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2198file.
2199
2200@item extern int i;
2201An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2202There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2203variable somewhere.
2204
2205@item int i;
2206A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2207variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2208The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2209single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2210size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2211a definition of the same variable.
2212@end table
2213
2214The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2215Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2216just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2217encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2218a common symbol.
2219
2220@enumerate
2221@item
2222Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2223definition for the symbol.
2224@smallexample
2225@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2226 overridden by definition
2227@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2228@end smallexample
2229
2230@item
2231Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2232the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2233except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2234@smallexample
2235@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2236 overriding common
2237@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2238@end smallexample
2239
2240@item
2241Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2242@smallexample
2243@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2244 of `@var{symbol}'
2245@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2246@end smallexample
2247
2248@item
2249Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2250@smallexample
2251@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2252 overridden by larger common
2253@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2254@end smallexample
2255
2256@item
2257Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2258the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2259encountered in a different order.
2260@smallexample
2261@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2262 overriding smaller common
2263@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2264@end smallexample
2265@end enumerate
2266
2267@kindex --warn-constructors
2268@item --warn-constructors
2269Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2270object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2271detect the use of global constructors.
2272
2273@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2274@item --warn-multiple-gp
2275Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2276This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2277Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2278section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2279of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2280base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2281base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2282bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2283large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2284values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2285option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2286
2287@kindex --warn-once
2288@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2289@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2290@item --warn-once
2291Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2292which refers to it.
2293
2294@kindex --warn-section-align
2295@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2296@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2297@item --warn-section-align
2298Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2299alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2300The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2301is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2302the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2303
8fdd7217
NC
2304@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2305@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2306Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2307
a0c402a5
L
2308@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2309@item --warn-alternate-em
2310Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2311
560e09e9
NC
2312@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2313@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2314If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2315@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2316This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2317
2318@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2319@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2320This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2321it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2322
252b5132
RH
2323@kindex --whole-archive
2324@cindex including an entire archive
2325@item --whole-archive
2326For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2327@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2328in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2329files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2330library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2331library. This option may be used more than once.
2332
7ec229ce 2333Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2334about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2335Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2336list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2337your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2338
2509a395
SL
2339@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2340@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2341Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2342@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2343undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2344@var{symbol}.
2345
2346This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2347wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2348wishes to call the system function, it should call
2349@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2350
2351Here is a trivial example:
2352
2353@smallexample
2354void *
cc2f008e 2355__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2356@{
cc2f008e 2357 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2358 return __real_malloc (c);
2359@}
2360@end smallexample
2361
ff5dcc92 2362If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2363all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2364instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2365call the real @code{malloc} function.
2366
2367You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2368links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2369you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2370file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2371call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2372
6aa29e7b 2373@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b 2374@kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
6aa29e7b 2375@item --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b
NC
2376@itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2377Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2378(@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2379section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
6aa29e7b 2380
e41b3a13
JJ
2381@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2382@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2383Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2384generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2385if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2386
6c1439be
L
2387@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2388@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2389@item --enable-new-dtags
2390@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2391This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2392systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2393@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2394and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2395If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2396created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2397those options are only available for ELF systems.
2398
2d643429 2399@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2400@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2401Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2402close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2403time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2404increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2405value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2406
fdc90cb4
JJ
2407@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2408@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2409Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2410@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2411new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2412the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2413hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2414
0ce398f1
L
2415@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2416@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2417@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2418@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2419@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2420@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2421@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2422@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
9af89fba
NC
2423On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2424compressed using zlib.
2425
2426@option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2427sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2428DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2429instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2430also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2431sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2432
2433The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2434@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2435
2436Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2437sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2438for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2439uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2440
2441The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2442involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2443default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2444@option{--help} option.
0ce398f1 2445
35835446
JR
2446@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2447@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2448This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2449linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2450for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2451about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2452
4f9c04f7 2453Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 24541021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2455run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2456has been used.
2457
2458The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2459enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2460
c0065db7
RM
2461@kindex --build-id
2462@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2463@item --build-id
2464@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c 2465Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
6033bf41 2466or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
61e2488c
JT
2467unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2468@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2469@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2470@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2471the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2472string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2473@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2474is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2475
2476The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2477that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2478unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2479to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2480file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2481string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2482
2483Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2484@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2485@end table
2486
0285c67d
NC
2487@c man end
2488
36f63dca 2489@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2490
0285c67d
NC
2491@c man begin OPTIONS
2492
ff5dcc92 2493The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2494the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2495normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2496use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2497@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2498like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2499symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2500object file).
2501
2502In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2503support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2504PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2505values by either a space or an equals sign.
2506
ff5dcc92 2507@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2508
2509@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2510@item --add-stdcall-alias
2511If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2512as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2513[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2514
2515@kindex --base-file
2516@item --base-file @var{file}
2517Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2518addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2519@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2520[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2521
2522@kindex --dll
2523@item --dll
2524Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2525@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2526file.
bb10df36 2527[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2528
88183869
DK
2529@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2530@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2531@item --enable-long-section-names
2532@itemx --disable-long-section-names
56e6cf80 2533The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
88183869 2534the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
56e6cf80
NC
2535for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2536fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
88183869
DK
2537to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2538allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2539disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2540generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2541as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2542with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2543GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2544information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2545option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2546section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2547when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2548image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2549[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2550
252b5132
RH
2551@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2552@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2553@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2554@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2555If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2556do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2557only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2558resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2559undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2560@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2561to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2562warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2563import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2564to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2565feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2566@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2567mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2568[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2569
522f09cd
KT
2570@kindex --leading-underscore
2571@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2572@item --leading-underscore
2573@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2574For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2575in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2576disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2577
252b5132
RH
2578@cindex DLLs, creating
2579@kindex --export-all-symbols
2580@item --export-all-symbols
2581If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2582be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2583otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2584explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2585attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2586option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2587@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2588@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2589exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2590re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2591such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2592@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2593@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2594Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2595not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2596extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2597(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2598These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2599@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2600@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2601@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2602@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2603[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2604
2605@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2606@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2607Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2608exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2609[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2610
2927aaca
NC
2611@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2612@item --exclude-all-symbols
2613Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2614[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2615
252b5132
RH
2616@kindex --file-alignment
2617@item --file-alignment
2618Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2619file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2620512.
bb10df36 2621[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2622
2623@cindex heap size
2624@kindex --heap
2625@item --heap @var{reserve}
2626@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2627Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2628to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2629committed.
bb10df36 2630[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2631
2632@cindex image base
2633@kindex --image-base
2634@item --image-base @var{value}
2635Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2636the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2637is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2638your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2639other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2640for dlls.
bb10df36 2641[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2642
2643@kindex --kill-at
2644@item --kill-at
2645If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2646symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2647[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2648
26d2d8a2
BF
2649@kindex --large-address-aware
2650@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2651If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2652header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2653greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2654or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2655section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2656[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2657
f69a2f97
NC
2658@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2659@item --disable-large-address-aware
2660Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2661This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2662driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2663addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2664[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2665
252b5132
RH
2666@kindex --major-image-version
2667@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2668Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2669[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2670
2671@kindex --major-os-version
2672@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2673Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2674[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2675
2676@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2677@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2678Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2679[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2680
2681@kindex --minor-image-version
2682@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2683Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2684[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2685
2686@kindex --minor-os-version
2687@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2688Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2689[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2690
2691@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2692@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2693Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2694[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2695
2696@cindex DEF files, creating
2697@cindex DLLs, creating
2698@kindex --output-def
2699@item --output-def @var{file}
2700The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2701file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2702(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2703library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2704automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2705[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2706
b044cda1 2707@cindex DLLs, creating
b044cda1
CW
2708@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2709@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2710@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2711Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2712@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2713By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2714for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2715execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2716[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2717
2718@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2719@item --disable-auto-image-base
2720Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2721user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2722default.
bb10df36 2723[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2724
2725@cindex DLLs, linking to
2726@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2727@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2728When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2729search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2730@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2731between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2732uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2733@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2734[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2735
2736@kindex --enable-auto-import
2737@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2738Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2739DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2740building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2741'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2742to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2743specification published by Microsoft.
2744
e2a83dd0
NC
2745Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2746data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2747placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2748around a problem with consts that is described here:
2749http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2750
4d8907ac
DS
2751Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2752see this message:
0d888aac 2753
ece2d90e 2754"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2755documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2756
ece2d90e
NC
2757This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2758ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2759allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2760fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2761constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2762multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2763this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2764of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2765the warning, and exit.
2766
2767There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2768data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2769
2fa9fc65
NC
2770One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2771of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2772this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2773
c0065db7
RM
2774A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2775that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2776there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2777a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2778
2779@example
2780extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2781extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2782 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2783@end example
2784
2785or
2786
2787@example
2788extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2789extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2790 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2791@end example
2792
c0065db7 2793For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2794is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2795
2796@example
2797extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2798extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2799 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2800@end example
2801
c406afaf
NC
2802or
2803
2804@example
2805extern long long extern_ll;
2806extern_ll -->
2807 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2808@end example
2809
2fa9fc65 2810A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2811'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2812@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2813requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2814building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2815merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2816between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2817constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2818
2819Original:
2820@example
2821--foo.h
2822extern int arr[];
2823--foo.c
2824#include "foo.h"
2825void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2826 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2827@}
2828@end example
2829
2830Solution 1:
2831@example
2832--foo.h
2833extern int arr[];
2834--foo.c
2835#include "foo.h"
2836void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2837 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2838 volatile int *parr = arr;
2839 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2840@}
2841@end example
2842
2843Solution 2:
2844@example
2845--foo.h
2846/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2847#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2848 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2849#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2850#else
2851#define FOO_IMPORT
2852#endif
2853extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2854--foo.c
2855#include "foo.h"
2856void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2857 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2858@}
2859@end example
2860
c0065db7 2861A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2862library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2863for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2864functions).
bb10df36 2865[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2866
2867@kindex --disable-auto-import
2868@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2869Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2870@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2871[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2872
2fa9fc65
NC
2873@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2874@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2875If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2876that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2877a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2878environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2879[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2880
2881@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2882@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2883Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
676ee43b 2884DLLs.
bb10df36 2885[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2886
b044cda1
CW
2887@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2888@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2889Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2890[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2891
252b5132
RH
2892@kindex --section-alignment
2893@item --section-alignment
2894Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2895addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2896[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2897
2898@cindex stack size
2899@kindex --stack
2900@item --stack @var{reserve}
2901@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2902Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2903to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2904committed.
bb10df36 2905[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2906
2907@kindex --subsystem
2908@item --subsystem @var{which}
2909@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2910@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2911Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2912legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2913@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2914the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2915@var{which}.
bb10df36 2916[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2917
2f563b51
DK
2918The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2919of the PE file header:
2920[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2921
2d5c3743
NC
2922@kindex --high-entropy-va
2923@item --high-entropy-va
2924Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2925(ASLR).
2926
2f563b51
DK
2927@kindex --dynamicbase
2928@item --dynamicbase
2929The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2930randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2931Vista for i386 PE targets.
2932
2933@kindex --forceinteg
2934@item --forceinteg
2935Code integrity checks are enforced.
2936
2937@kindex --nxcompat
2938@item --nxcompat
2939The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2940This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2941
2942@kindex --no-isolation
2943@item --no-isolation
2944Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2945
2946@kindex --no-seh
2947@item --no-seh
2948The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2949this image.
2950
2951@kindex --no-bind
2952@item --no-bind
2953Do not bind this image.
2954
2955@kindex --wdmdriver
2956@item --wdmdriver
2957The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2958
2f563b51
DK
2959@kindex --tsaware
2960@item --tsaware
2961The image is Terminal Server aware.
2962
0cb112f7
CF
2963@kindex --insert-timestamp
2964@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
2965@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2966Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2967as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2968other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
56e6cf80 2969will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
eeb14e5a
LZ
2970same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2971can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
56e6cf80 2972that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
eeb14e5a 2973identically.
252b5132
RH
2974@end table
2975
0285c67d
NC
2976@c man end
2977
ac145307
BS
2978@ifset C6X
2979@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2980
2981@c man begin OPTIONS
2982
2983The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2984libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2985all executables use an index of 0.
2986
2987@table @gcctabopt
2988
2989@kindex --dsbt-size
2990@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
56e6cf80 2991This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
ac145307
BS
2992or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2993entries.
2994
2995@kindex --dsbt-index
2996@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2997This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2998to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2999executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
3000@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
3001
fbd9ad90
PB
3002@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3003The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3004exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3005
ac145307
BS
3006@end table
3007
3008@c man end
3009@end ifset
3010
93fd0973
SC
3011@ifset M68HC11
3012@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3013
3014@c man begin OPTIONS
3015
3016The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3017memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3018
3019@table @gcctabopt
3020
3021@kindex --no-trampoline
3022@item --no-trampoline
3023This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3024is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3025instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3026
3027@kindex --bank-window
3028@item --bank-window @var{name}
3029This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3030the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3031The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3032paging and addresses within the memory window.
3033
3034@end table
3035
3036@c man end
3037@end ifset
3038
7fb9f789
NC
3039@ifset M68K
3040@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3041
3042@c man begin OPTIONS
3043
3044The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3045when linking for 68K targets.
3046
3047@table @gcctabopt
3048
3049@kindex --got
3050@item --got=@var{type}
3051This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3052@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3053@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3054Info entry for @file{ld}.
3055
3056@end table
3057
3058@c man end
3059@end ifset
3060
833794fc
MR
3061@ifset MIPS
3062@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3063
3064@c man begin OPTIONS
3065
3066The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
8b10b0b3
MR
3067generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3068linking for MIPS targets.
833794fc
MR
3069
3070@table @gcctabopt
3071
3072@kindex --insn32
3073@item --insn32
3074@kindex --no-insn32
3075@itemx --no-insn32
3076These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3077generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3078or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
307932-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3080used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3081possible.
3082
8b10b0b3
MR
3083@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3084@item --ignore-branch-isa
3085@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3086@itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3087These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3088transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3089accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3090is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3091instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3092equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3093calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3094a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3095an error.
3096
833794fc
MR
3097@end table
3098
3099@c man end
3100@end ifset
3101
252b5132
RH
3102@ifset UsesEnvVars
3103@node Environment
3104@section Environment Variables
3105
0285c67d
NC
3106@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3107
560e09e9 3108You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
3109@ifclear SingleFormat
3110@code{GNUTARGET},
3111@end ifclear
3112@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 3113
36f63dca 3114@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
3115@kindex GNUTARGET
3116@cindex default input format
3117@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3118use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3119of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 3120@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
3121of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3122attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3123this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3124there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3125object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3126BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3127in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 3128@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
3129
3130@kindex LDEMULATION
3131@cindex default emulation
3132@cindex emulation, default
3133@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3134@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3135behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3136available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3137the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3138variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3139linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
3140
3141@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3142@cindex demangling, default
3143Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3144@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3145default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3146a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3147may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3148options.
3149
0285c67d
NC
3150@c man end
3151@end ifset
3152
252b5132
RH
3153@node Scripts
3154@chapter Linker Scripts
3155
3156@cindex scripts
3157@cindex linker scripts
3158@cindex command files
3159Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3160written in the linker command language.
3161
3162The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3163the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3164the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3165more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3166direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3167described below.
3168
3169The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3170yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3171linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
3172to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
3173such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3174
3175You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3176line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3177default linker script.
3178
3179You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3180to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3181Linker Scripts}.
3182
3183@menu
3184* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3185* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3186* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3187* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3188* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3189* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3190* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3191* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3192* VERSION:: VERSION Command
3193* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3194* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3195@end menu
3196
3197@node Basic Script Concepts
3198@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3199@cindex linker script concepts
3200We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3201describe the linker script language.
3202
3203The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3204file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3205@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3206The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3207purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3208among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3209section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3210in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3211
3212Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3213also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3214contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3215the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3216A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3217area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3218loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3219which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3220of debugging information.
3221
3222Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3223first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3224the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3225@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3226section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3227same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3228is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3229(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3230based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3231RAM address would be the VMA.
3232
3233You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3234program with the @samp{-h} option.
3235
3236Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3237@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3238has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3239information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3240will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3241static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3242referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3243
3244You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3245program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3246option.
3247
3248@node Script Format
3249@section Linker Script Format
3250@cindex linker script format
3251Linker scripts are text files.
3252
3253You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3254either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3255symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3256generally ignored.
3257
3258Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3259If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3260otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3261double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3262file name.
3263
3264You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3265@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3266to whitespace.
3267
3268@node Simple Example
3269@section Simple Linker Script Example
3270@cindex linker script example
3271@cindex example of linker script
3272Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3273
3274The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3275@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3276memory layout of the output file.
3277
3278The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3279describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3280code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3281@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3282Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3283your input files.
3284
3285For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
32860x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3287linker script which will do that:
3288@smallexample
3289SECTIONS
3290@{
3291 . = 0x10000;
3292 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3293 . = 0x8000000;
3294 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3295 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3296@}
3297@end smallexample
3298
3299You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3300followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3301descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3302
252b5132
RH
3303The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3304sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3305counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3306other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3307current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3308incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3309@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3310
3311The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3312required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3313after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3314which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3315wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3316means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3317
3318Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3319@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3320@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3321
3322The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3323the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3324at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3325output section, the value of the location counter will be
3326@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3327effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3328immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3329
3330The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3331alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3332example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3333sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3334may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3335sections.
3336
3337That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3338
3339@node Simple Commands
3340@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3341@cindex linker script simple commands
3342In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3343
3344@menu
3345* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3346* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3347@ifclear SingleFormat
3348* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3349@end ifclear
3350
4a93e180 3351* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3352* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3353@end menu
3354
3355@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3356@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3357@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3358@cindex start of execution
3359@cindex first instruction
3360@cindex entry point
3361The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3362point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3363entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3364@smallexample
3365ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3366@end smallexample
3367
3368There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3369entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3370stopping when one of them succeeds:
3371@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3372@item
252b5132 3373the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3374@item
252b5132 3375the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3376@item
3ab904c4
NC
3377the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3378targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3379check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3380@item
252b5132 3381the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3382@item
252b5132
RH
3383The address @code{0}.
3384@end itemize
3385
3386@node File Commands
36f63dca 3387@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3388@cindex linker script file commands
3389Several linker script commands deal with files.
3390
3391@table @code
3392@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3393@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3394@cindex including a linker script
3395Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3396be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3397with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
339810 levels deep.
3399
4006703d
NS
3400You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3401@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3402
252b5132
RH
3403@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3404@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3405@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3406@cindex input files in linker scripts
3407@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3408@cindex linker script input object files
3409The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3410in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3411
3412For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3413a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3414then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3415
3416In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3417script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3418
e3f2db7f
AO
3419In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3420with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3421located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3422for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3423open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3424linker will search through the archive library search path.
3425The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3aa2d05a
NC
3426as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3427path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
3428@ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3429
ff5dcc92 3430If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3431name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3432@samp{-l}.
3433
3434When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3435files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3436script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3437
3438@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3439@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3440@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3441@cindex grouping input files
3442The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3443files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3444new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3445in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3446
b717d30e
JJ
3447@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3448@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3449@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3450This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3451commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3452as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3453with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3454when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3455@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3456and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3457setting afterwards.
3458
252b5132
RH
3459@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3460@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3461@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3462The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3463@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3464@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3465Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3466precedence.
3467
3468You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3469output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3470
3471@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3472@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3473@cindex library search path in linker script
3474@cindex archive search path in linker script
3475@cindex search path in linker script
3476The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3477@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3478@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3479on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3480are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3481the command line option are searched first.
3482
3483@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3484@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3485@cindex first input file
3486The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3487that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3488though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3489when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3490first file.
3491@end table
3492
3493@ifclear SingleFormat
3494@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3495@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3496A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3497
3498@table @code
3499@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3500@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3501@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3502@cindex output file format in linker script
3503The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3504output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3505exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3506(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3507line option takes precedence.
3508
3509You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3510formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3511This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3512desired endianness.
3513
3514If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3515will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3516output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3517used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3518
3519For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3520command:
3521@smallexample
3522OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3523@end smallexample
3524This says that the default format for the output file is
3525@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3526option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3527format.
3528
3529@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3530@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3531@cindex input file format in linker script
3532The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3533files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3534This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3535(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3536is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3537command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3538@end table
3539@end ifclear
3540
4a93e180
NC
3541@node REGION_ALIAS
3542@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3543@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3544@cindex region alias
3545@cindex region names
3546
3547Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3548@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3549
3550@smallexample
3551REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3552@end smallexample
3553
3554The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3555memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3556to memory regions. An example follows.
3557
3558Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3559memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3560that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3561non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3562access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3563read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3564sections:
3565
3566@itemize @bullet
3567@item
3568@code{.text} program code;
3569@item
3570@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3571@item
3572@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3573@item
3574@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3575@end itemize
3576
3577The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3578part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3579output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3580systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3581@code{C}:
3582@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3583@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3584@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3585@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3586@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3587@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3588@end multitable
3589The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3590loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3591the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3592the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3593
3594The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3595includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3596memory layout:
3597@smallexample
3598INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3599
3600SECTIONS
3601 @{
3602 .text :
3603 @{
3604 *(.text)
3605 @} > REGION_TEXT
3606 .rodata :
3607 @{
3608 *(.rodata)
3609 rodata_end = .;
3610 @} > REGION_RODATA
3611 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3612 @{
3613 data_start = .;
3614 *(.data)
3615 @} > REGION_DATA
3616 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3617 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3618 .bss :
3619 @{
3620 *(.bss)
3621 @} > REGION_BSS
3622 @}
3623@end smallexample
3624
3625Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3626regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3627variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3628@table @code
3629@item A
3630Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3631@smallexample
3632MEMORY
3633 @{
3634 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3635 @}
3636
3637REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3638REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3639REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3640REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3641@end smallexample
3642@item B
3643Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3644into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3645@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3646@smallexample
3647MEMORY
3648 @{
3649 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3650 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3651 @}
3652
3653REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3654REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3655REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3656REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3657@end smallexample
3658@item C
3659Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3660@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3661initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3662system start into the @code{RAM}.
3663@smallexample
3664MEMORY
3665 @{
3666 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3667 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3668 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3669 @}
3670
3671REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3672REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3673REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3674REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3675@end smallexample
3676@end table
3677
3678It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3679@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3680necessary:
3681@smallexample
3682#include <string.h>
3683
3684extern char data_start [];
3685extern char data_size [];
3686extern char data_load_start [];
3687
3688void copy_data(void)
3689@{
3690 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3691 @{
3692 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3693 @}
3694@}
3695@end smallexample
3696
252b5132 3697@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3698@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3699There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3700
3701@table @code
3702@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3703@kindex ASSERT
3704@cindex assertion in linker script
3705Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3706with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3707
fd1c4238
NC
3708Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3709take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3710inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3711for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3712symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3713
3714@smallexample
3715 .stack :
3716 @{
3717 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3718 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3719 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3720 @}
3721@end smallexample
3722
3723will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3724PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3725can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3726
3727@smallexample
3728 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3729 .stack :
3730 @{
3731 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3732 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3733 @}
3734@end smallexample
3735
3736will work.
3737
252b5132
RH
3738@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3739@kindex EXTERN
3740@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3741Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3742symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3743modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3744each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3745command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3746
3747@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3748@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3749@cindex common allocation in linker script
3750This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3751to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3752output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3753
4818e05f
AM
3754@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3755@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3756@cindex common allocation in linker script
3757This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3758command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3759to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3760
7bdf4127
AB
3761@item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3762@kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3763@cindex group allocation in linker script
3764@cindex section groups
3765@cindex COMDAT
3766This command has the same effect as the
3767@samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
3768@command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
3769and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
3770specified (@samp{-r}).
3771
53d25da6
AM
3772@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3773@kindex INSERT
3774@cindex insert user script into default script
3775This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3776augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3777inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3778@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3779default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3780sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3781linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3782insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3783linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3784default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3785of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3786to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3787is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3788
3789@smallexample
3790SECTIONS
3791@{
3792 OVERLAY :
3793 @{
3794 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3795 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3796 @}
3797@}
3798INSERT AFTER .text;
3799@end smallexample
3800
252b5132
RH
3801@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3802@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3803@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3804This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3805references among certain output sections.
3806
3807In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3808using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3809will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3810errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3811a function defined in the other section.
3812
3813The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3814@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3815an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3816@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3817names.
3818
cdf96953
MF
3819@item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3820@kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3821@cindex cross references
3822This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3823references to one section from a list of other sections.
3824
3825The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3826output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3827a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3828there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3829must never call back.
3830
3831The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3832The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3833If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3834the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3835status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3836names, not input section names.
3837
252b5132
RH
3838@ifclear SingleFormat
3839@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3840@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3841@cindex machine architecture
3842@cindex architecture
3843Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3844of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3845architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3846the @samp{-f} option.
3847@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3848
3849@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3850@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3851This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3852@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3853in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3854@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3855@end table
3856
3857@node Assignments
3858@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3859@cindex assignment in scripts
3860@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3861@cindex variables, defining
3862You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3863the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3864
3865@menu
3866* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3867* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3868* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3869* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3870* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3871@end menu
3872
3873@node Simple Assignments
3874@subsection Simple Assignments
3875
3876You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3877
3878@table @code
3879@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3880@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3881@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3882@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3883@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3884@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3885@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3886@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3887@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3888@end table
3889
3890The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3891@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3892defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3893
3894The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3895may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3896
3897The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3898
3899Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3900
3901You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3902statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3903section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3904
3905The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3906expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3907
3908Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3909assignments may be used:
3910
3911@smallexample
3912floating_point = 0;
3913SECTIONS
3914@{
3915 .text :
3916 @{
3917 *(.text)
3918 _etext = .;
3919 @}
156e34dd 3920 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3921 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3922@}
3923@end smallexample
3924@noindent
3925In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3926zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3927the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3928defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3929upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3930
eb8476a6
MR
3931@node HIDDEN
3932@subsection HIDDEN
3933@cindex HIDDEN
3934For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3935exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3936
3937Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3938@code{HIDDEN}:
3939
3940@smallexample
3941HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3942SECTIONS
3943@{
3944 .text :
3945 @{
3946 *(.text)
3947 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3948 @}
3949 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3950 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3951@}
3952@end smallexample
3953@noindent
3954In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3955
252b5132
RH
3956@node PROVIDE
3957@subsection PROVIDE
3958@cindex PROVIDE
3959In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3960only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3961the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3962@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3963@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3964@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3965@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3966@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3967
3968Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3969@smallexample
3970SECTIONS
3971@{
3972 .text :
3973 @{
3974 *(.text)
3975 _etext = .;
3976 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3977 @}
3978@}
3979@end smallexample
3980
3981In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3982underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3983the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3984underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3985If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3986linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3987
7af8e998
L
3988@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3989@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3990@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3991Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3992hidden and won't be exported.
3993
73ae6183
NC
3994@node Source Code Reference
3995@subsection Source Code Reference
3996
3997Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3998intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3999a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
4000symbol that does not have a value.
4001
4002Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4003transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4004stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4005prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4006mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4007of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4008variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4009linker script variable might be referred to as:
4010
4011@smallexample
4012 extern int foo;
4013@end smallexample
4014
4015But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4016
4017@smallexample
4018 _foo = 1000;
4019@end smallexample
4020
4021In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4022transformation has taken place.
4023
4024When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4025things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4026in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4027second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4028table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4029contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4030value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4031
4032@smallexample
4033 int foo = 1000;
4034@end smallexample
4035
10bf6894 4036creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
4037holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4038number 1000 is initially stored.
4039
4040When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4041first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4042memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4043So:
4044
4045@smallexample
4046 foo = 1;
4047@end smallexample
4048
4049looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4050associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4051address. Whereas:
4052
4053@smallexample
4054 int * a = & foo;
4055@end smallexample
4056
10bf6894 4057looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
4058and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4059the variable @samp{a}.
4060
4061Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4062the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4063an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4064
4065@smallexample
4066 foo = 1000;
4067@end smallexample
4068
4069creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4070the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4071address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4072linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4073access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4074
4075Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4076you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4077use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4078section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4079linker script contains these declarations:
4080
4081@smallexample
4082@group
4083 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
a5e406b5 4084 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
73ae6183
NC
4085 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4086@end group
4087@end smallexample
4088
4089Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4090
4091@smallexample
4092@group
4093 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 4094
73ae6183
NC
4095 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4096@end group
4097@end smallexample
4098
4099Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
5707d2ad
NC
4100Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4101arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4102
4103@smallexample
4104@group
4105 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4106
4107 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4108@end group
4109@end smallexample
4110
4111Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4112operators.
73ae6183 4113
252b5132 4114@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 4115@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
4116@kindex SECTIONS
4117The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4118into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4119
4120The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4121@smallexample
4122SECTIONS
4123@{
4124 @var{sections-command}
4125 @var{sections-command}
4126 @dots{}
4127@}
4128@end smallexample
4129
4130Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4131
4132@itemize @bullet
4133@item
4134an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4135@item
4136a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4137@item
4138an output section description
4139@item
4140an overlay description
4141@end itemize
4142
4143The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4144@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4145those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4146understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4147the layout of the output file.
4148
4149Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4150below.
4151
4152If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4153linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4154section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4155input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4156example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4157in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4158
4159@menu
4160* Output Section Description:: Output section description
4161* Output Section Name:: Output section name
4162* Output Section Address:: Output section address
4163* Input Section:: Input section description
4164* Output Section Data:: Output section data
4165* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4166* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4167* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4168* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4169@end menu
4170
4171@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 4172@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
4173The full description of an output section looks like this:
4174@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4175@group
7e7d5768 4176@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 4177 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 4178 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
4179 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4180 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4181 @{
4182 @var{output-section-command}
4183 @var{output-section-command}
4184 @dots{}
abc9061b 4185 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4186@end group
4187@end smallexample
4188
4189Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4190
4191The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4192name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
4193The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4194the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
4195The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4196
4197Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4198
4199@itemize @bullet
4200@item
4201a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4202@item
4203an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4204@item
4205data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4206@item
4207a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4208@end itemize
4209
4210@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 4211@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
4212@cindex name, section
4213@cindex section name
4214The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4215meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4216support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4217must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4218example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4219output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4220names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4221quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4222characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4223commas must be quoted.
4224
4225The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4226Discarding}.
4227
4228@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 4229@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
4230@cindex address, section
4231@cindex section address
4232The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
4233address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4234is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4235
4236If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4237section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4238to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4239alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4240contained within the output section.
4241
4242The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4243
4244@itemize @bullet
4245@item
4246If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4247is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4248in that region.
4249
4250@item
4251If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4252regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4253section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4254be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4255
4256@item
4257If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4258the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4259counter.
4260@end itemize
4261
4262@noindent
4263For example:
4264
252b5132
RH
4265@smallexample
4266.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4267@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4268
252b5132
RH
4269@noindent
4270and
ea5cae92 4271
252b5132
RH
4272@smallexample
4273.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4274@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4275
252b5132
RH
4276@noindent
4277are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4278@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4279counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4280counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4281input sections.
252b5132
RH
4282
4283The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4284For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4285so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4286do something like this:
4287@smallexample
4288.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4289@end smallexample
4290@noindent
4291This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4292aligned upward to the specified value.
4293
4294Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4295location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4296sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4297
4298@node Input Section
36f63dca 4299@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4300@cindex input sections
4301@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4302The most common output section command is an input section description.
4303
4304The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4305You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4306in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4307map the input files into your memory layout.
4308
4309@menu
4310* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4311* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4312* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4313* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4314* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4315@end menu
4316
4317@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4318@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4319@cindex input section basics
4320An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4321by a list of section names in parentheses.
4322
4323The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4324describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4325
4326The most common input section description is to include all input
4327sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4328include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4329@smallexample
4330*(.text)
4331@end smallexample
4332@noindent
18625d54 4333Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
8f1732fc 4334@cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
18625d54
CM
4335of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4336match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4337example:
252b5132 4338@smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4339EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4340@end smallexample
4341@noindent
4342will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4343and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4344placed inside the section list, for example:
4345@smallexample
b4346c09 4346*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4347@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4348@noindent
4349The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4350two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4351more than one section, as described below.
252b5132
RH
4352
4353There are two ways to include more than one section:
4354@smallexample
4355*(.text .rdata)
4356*(.text) *(.rdata)
4357@end smallexample
4358@noindent
4359The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4360@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4361first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4362they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4363@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4364@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4365
8f1732fc
AB
4366When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4367is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4368immediately following section, for example:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4369@smallexample
4370*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4371@end smallexample
4372@noindent
4373will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4374@file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4375from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4376exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
8f1732fc 4377could be modified to:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4378@smallexample
4379*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4380@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4381@noindent
4382Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4383before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4384all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4385@smallexample
4386EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4387@end smallexample
a5bf7d4f 4388
252b5132
RH
4389You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4390You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4391needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4392@smallexample
4393data.o(.data)
4394@end smallexample
4395
ae17ab41
CM
4396To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4397of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4398
4399Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4400
4401@smallexample
4402@group
4403SECTIONS @{
4404 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4405 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4406@}
4407@end group
4408@end smallexample
4409
4410In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4411input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4412@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4413@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4414whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4415
967928e9
AM
4416You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4417matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4418with no whitespace around the colon.
4419
4420@table @samp
4421@item archive:file
4422matches file within archive
4423@item archive:
4424matches the whole archive
4425@item :file
4426matches file but not one in an archive
4427@end table
4428
4429Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4430wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4431single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4432@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4433within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4434also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4435other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4436from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4437command.
4438
252b5132
RH
4439If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4440the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4441commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4442@smallexample
4443data.o
4444@end smallexample
4445
967928e9
AM
4446When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4447and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4448characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4449name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4450did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4451though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4452@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4453the archive search path.
4454
4455@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4456@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4457@cindex input section wildcards
4458@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4459@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4460@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4461In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4462name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4463
4464The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4465pattern for the file name.
4466
4467The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4468
4469@table @samp
4470@item *
4471matches any number of characters
4472@item ?
4473matches any single character
4474@item [@var{chars}]
4475matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4476character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4477@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4478@item \
4479quotes the following character
4480@end table
4481
4482When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4483will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4484Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4485exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4486@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4487a @samp{/} character.
4488
4489File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4490specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4491does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4492
4493If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4494appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4495will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4496sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4497@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4498@smallexample
4499.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4500.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4501@end smallexample
4502
bcaa7b3e 4503@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4504Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4505in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4506this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4507pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4508@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4509into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4510
bcaa7b3e
L
4511@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4512@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4513difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4514descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4515Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4516reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4517
02ecc8e9
L
4518@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4519@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4520difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4521ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4522encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4523
bcaa7b3e
L
4524@cindex SORT
4525@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4526
4527When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4528can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4529
4530@enumerate
4531@item
4532@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4533It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4534sections have the same name.
4535@item
4536@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4537It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4538sections have the same alignment.
4539@item
c0065db7 4540@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4541treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4542@item
4543@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4544is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4545@item
4546All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4547@end enumerate
4548
4549When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4550section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4551takes precedence over the command line option.
4552
4553If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4554command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4555treated as nested sorting command.
4556
4557@enumerate
4558@item
4559@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4560@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4561@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4562@item
4563@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4564@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4565@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4566@end enumerate
4567
4568If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4569command line option will be ignored.
4570
eda680f8
L
4571@cindex SORT_NONE
4572@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4573section sorting option.
4574
252b5132
RH
4575If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4576@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4577precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4578
4579This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4580files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4581sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4582The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4583with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4584linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4585@smallexample
4586@group
4587SECTIONS @{
4588 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4589 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4590 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4591 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4592@}
4593@end group
4594@end smallexample
4595
4596@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4597@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4598@cindex common symbol placement
4599@cindex uninitialized data placement
4600A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4601file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4602linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4603named @samp{COMMON}.
4604
4605You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4606other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4607particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4608input files are placed in another section.
4609
4610In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4611@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4612@smallexample
4613.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4614@end smallexample
4615
4616@cindex scommon section
4617@cindex small common symbols
4618Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4619example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4620symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4621different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4622the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4623symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4624to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4625locations.
4626
4627@cindex [COMMON]
4628You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4629notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4630@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4631
4632@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4633@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4634@cindex KEEP
4635@cindex garbage collection
4636When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4637it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4638This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4639with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4640@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4641
4642@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4643@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4644The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4645to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4646start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4647@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4648follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4649@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4650@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4651All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4652files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4653
4654@smallexample
4655@group
4656SECTIONS @{
4657 outputa 0x10000 :
4658 @{
4659 all.o
4660 foo.o (.input1)
4661 @}
36f63dca
NC
4662@end group
4663@group
252b5132
RH
4664 outputb :
4665 @{
4666 foo.o (.input2)
4667 foo1.o (.input1)
4668 @}
36f63dca
NC
4669@end group
4670@group
252b5132
RH
4671 outputc :
4672 @{
4673 *(.input1)
4674 *(.input2)
4675 @}
4676@}
4677@end group
a1ab1d2a 4678@end smallexample
252b5132 4679
cbd0eecf
L
4680If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4681and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4682automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4683__stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4684indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4685respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4686C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4687
252b5132 4688@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4689@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4690@cindex data
4691@cindex section data
4692@cindex output section data
4693@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4694@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4695@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4696@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4697@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4698You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4699@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4700an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4701parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4702value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4703counter.
4704
4705The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4706store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4707bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4708stored.
4709
4710For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4711of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4712@smallexample
4713BYTE(1)
4714LONG(addr)
4715@end smallexample
4716
4717When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4718same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4719target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4720@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4721@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4722
4723If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4724which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4725When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4726true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4727endianness of the first input object file.
4728
36f63dca 4729Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4730between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4731@smallexample
4732SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4733@end smallexample
4734whereas this will work:
4735@smallexample
4736SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4737@end smallexample
4738
252b5132
RH
4739@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4740@cindex holes, filling
4741@cindex unspecified memory
4742You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4743current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4744otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4745gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4746with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4747necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4748point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4749than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4750different parts of an output section.
4751
4752This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4753value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4754@smallexample
563e308f 4755FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4756@end smallexample
4757
4758The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4759section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4760part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4761entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4762precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4763expression.
252b5132
RH
4764
4765@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4766@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4767There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4768commands.
4769
4770@table @code
4771@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4772@cindex input filename symbols
4773@cindex filename symbols
4774@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4775The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4776The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4777file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4778the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4779
4780This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4781normally used for any other object file format.
4782
4783@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4784@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4785@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4786@item CONSTRUCTORS
4787When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4788unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4789destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4790arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4791automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4792For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4793linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4794@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4795ignored for other object file formats.
4796
4797The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4798constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4799Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4800the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4801first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4802of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4803compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4804formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4805@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4806the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4807destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4808@code{exit}.
4809
4810For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4811arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4812addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4813and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4814linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4815runtime code expects to see.
4816
4817@smallexample
4818 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4819 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4820 *(.ctors)
4821 LONG(0)
4822 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4823 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4824 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4825 *(.dtors)
4826 LONG(0)
4827 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4828@end smallexample
4829
4830If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4831which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4832are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4833are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4834command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4835@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4836@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4837@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4838
4839Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4840and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4841need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4842scripts.
4843
4844@end table
4845
4846@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4847@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4848@cindex discarding sections
4849@cindex sections, discarding
4850@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4851The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4852This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4853may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4854@smallexample
49c13adb 4855.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4856@end smallexample
4857@noindent
4858will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4859@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4860sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4861space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4862too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4863space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4864@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4865@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4866This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4867
a0976ea4 4868The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4869on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4870symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4871the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4872section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4873
4874@cindex /DISCARD/
4875The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4876input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4877section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4878
4879@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4880@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4881@cindex output section attributes
4882We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4883like this:
0c71d759 4884
252b5132 4885@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4886@group
7e7d5768 4887@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4888 [AT(@var{lma})]
4889 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4890 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4891 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4892 @{
4893 @var{output-section-command}
4894 @var{output-section-command}
4895 @dots{}
562d3460 4896 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4897@end group
4898@end smallexample
0c71d759 4899
252b5132
RH
4900We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4901@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4902remaining section attributes.
4903
a1ab1d2a 4904@menu
252b5132
RH
4905* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4906* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4907* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4908* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4909* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4910* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4911* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4912* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4913@end menu
4914
4915@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4916@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4917Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4918parentheses. The following types are defined:
4919
4920@table @code
4921@item NOLOAD
4922The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4923loaded into memory when the program is run.
4924@item DSECT
4925@itemx COPY
4926@itemx INFO
4927@itemx OVERLAY
4928These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4929rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4930marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4931section when the program is run.
4932@end table
4933
4934@kindex NOLOAD
4935@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4936@cindex loading, preventing
4937The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4938the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4939the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4940@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4941need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4942@smallexample
4943@group
4944SECTIONS @{
4945 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4946 @dots{}
4947@}
4948@end group
4949@end smallexample
4950
4951@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4952@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4953@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4954@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4955@cindex load address
4956@cindex section load address
4957Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4958@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4959@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4960specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4961address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4962
ea5cae92
NC
4963The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4964specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4965takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4966load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4967region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4968
4969If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4970section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4971load address:
4972
4973@itemize @bullet
4974@item
4975If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4976the LMA address as well.
4977
4978@item
4979If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4980
4981@item
4982Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4983with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4984section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4985VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4986the last section in the located region.
4987
4988@item
4989If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4990that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4991
4992@item
4993If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4994section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4995@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4996
4997@cindex ROM initialized data
4998@cindex initialized data in ROM
4999This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
5000example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
5001called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5002@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5003even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5004uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5005defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5006counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5007
5008@smallexample
5009@group
5010SECTIONS
5011 @{
5012 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 5013 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
5014 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5015 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5016 .bss 0x3000 :
5017 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5018@}
5019@end group
5020@end smallexample
5021
5022The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5023this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5024the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5025how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5026script.
5027
5028@smallexample
5029@group
5030extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5031char *src = &_etext;
5032char *dst = &_data;
5033
ea5cae92
NC
5034/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5035while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 5036 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 5037
ea5cae92 5038/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
5039for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5040 *dst = 0;
5041@end group
5042@end smallexample
5043
bbf115d3
L
5044@node Forced Output Alignment
5045@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5046@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5047@cindex forcing output section alignment
5048@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 5049You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
5050alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5051intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 5052
7e7d5768
AM
5053@node Forced Input Alignment
5054@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5055@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5056@cindex forcing input section alignment
5057@cindex input section alignment
5058You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5059SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5060sections, whether larger or smaller.
5061
0c71d759
NC
5062@node Output Section Constraint
5063@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5064@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5065@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5066@cindex constraints on output sections
5067You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5068of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5069read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5070@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5071
252b5132 5072@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 5073@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
5074@kindex >@var{region}
5075@cindex section, assigning to memory region
5076@cindex memory regions and sections
5077You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5078using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5079
5080Here is a simple example:
5081@smallexample
5082@group
5083MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5084SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5085@end group
5086@end smallexample
5087
5088@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 5089@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
5090@kindex :@var{phdr}
5091@cindex section, assigning to program header
5092@cindex program headers and sections
5093You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5094using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5095one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5096assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5097@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5098linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5099
5100Here is a simple example:
5101@smallexample
5102@group
5103PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5104SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5105@end group
5106@end smallexample
5107
5108@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 5109@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
5110@kindex =@var{fillexp}
5111@cindex section fill pattern
5112@cindex fill pattern, entire section
5113You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5114@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5115(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5116within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
5117alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5118necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 5119of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
5120an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5121fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 5122other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
5123pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5124expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
5125
5126You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 5127output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
5128
5129Here is a simple example:
5130@smallexample
5131@group
563e308f 5132SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
5133@end group
5134@end smallexample
5135
5136@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 5137@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
5138@kindex OVERLAY
5139@cindex overlays
5140An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5141are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5142the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5143copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5144required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5145can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5146than another.
5147
5148Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5149@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5150output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5151command is as follows:
5152@smallexample
5153@group
5154OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5155 @{
5156 @var{secname1}
5157 @{
5158 @var{output-section-command}
5159 @var{output-section-command}
5160 @dots{}
5161 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5162 @var{secname2}
5163 @{
5164 @var{output-section-command}
5165 @var{output-section-command}
5166 @dots{}
5167 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5168 @dots{}
abc9061b 5169 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
5170@end group
5171@end smallexample
5172
5173Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5174section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5175section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 5176those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
5177except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5178sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5179
abc9061b
CC
5180The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5181the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5182
252b5132
RH
5183The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5184addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5185memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5186whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5187and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5188and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5189
56dd11f0
NC
5190If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5191references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5192the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5193sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5194@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
5195
5196For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 5197provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
5198defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5199@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5200the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5201within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5202symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5203
5204At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5205the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5206
5207Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5208@code{SECTIONS} construct.
5209@smallexample
5210@group
5211 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5212 @{
5213 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5214 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5215 @}
5216@end group
5217@end smallexample
5218@noindent
5219This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5220address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5221@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 5222following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
5223@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5224@code{__load_stop_text1}.
5225
5226C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5227like the following.
5228
5229@smallexample
5230@group
5231 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5232 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5233 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5234@end group
5235@end smallexample
5236
5237Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5238everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5239example could have been written identically as follows.
5240
5241@smallexample
5242@group
5243 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5244 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5245 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 5246 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5247 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5248 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
5249 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5250@end group
5251@end smallexample
5252
5253@node MEMORY
36f63dca 5254@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
5255@kindex MEMORY
5256@cindex memory regions
5257@cindex regions of memory
5258@cindex allocating memory
5259@cindex discontinuous memory
5260The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5261memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5262
5263The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5264memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5265may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5266can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5267set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5268regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5269around to fit into the available regions.
5270
127fcdff
AB
5271A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5272however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5273specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5274@code{MEMORY} is:
252b5132
RH
5275@smallexample
5276@group
a1ab1d2a 5277MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5278 @{
5279 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5280 @dots{}
5281 @}
5282@end group
5283@end smallexample
5284
5285The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5286region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5287Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5288with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
5289must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5290add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 5291command.
252b5132
RH
5292
5293@cindex memory region attributes
5294The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5295whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5296not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5297@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5298section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5299the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5300them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5301
5302The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5303@table @samp
5304@item R
5305Read-only section
5306@item W
5307Read/write section
5308@item X
5309Executable section
5310@item A
5311Allocatable section
5312@item I
5313Initialized section
5314@item L
5315Same as @samp{I}
5316@item !
c09e9a8c 5317Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5318@end table
5319
5320If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5321@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5322attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5323in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5324attributes.
5325
5326@kindex ORIGIN =
5327@kindex o =
5328@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5329The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5330the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5331cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5332abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5333@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5334
5335@kindex LENGTH =
5336@kindex len =
5337@kindex l =
5338The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5339region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5340be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5341@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5342
5343In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5344available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5345and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5346linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5347is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5348or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5349explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5350region.
5351
5352@smallexample
5353@group
a1ab1d2a 5354MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5355 @{
5356 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5357 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5358 @}
5359@end group
5360@end smallexample
5361
5362Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5363specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5364@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5365a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5366output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5367was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5368the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5369output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5370region, the linker will issue an error message.
5371
3ec57632 5372It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5373expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5374@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5375
5376@smallexample
5377@group
c0065db7 5378 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5379@end group
5380@end smallexample
5381
252b5132
RH
5382@node PHDRS
5383@section PHDRS Command
5384@kindex PHDRS
5385@cindex program headers
5386@cindex ELF program headers
5387@cindex program segments
5388@cindex segments, ELF
5389The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5390@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5391loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5392program with the @samp{-p} option.
5393
5394When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5395reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5396program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5397This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5398interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5399
5400The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5401in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5402precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5403the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5404not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5405
5406The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5407generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5408ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5409
5410This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5411@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5412
5413@smallexample
5414@group
5415PHDRS
5416@{
5417 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5418 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5419@}
5420@end group
5421@end smallexample
5422
5423The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5424of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5425header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5426with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5427must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5428is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5429
5430Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5431system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5432specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5433sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5434attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5435Section Phdr}.
5436
5437It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5438merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5439repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5440contain the section.
5441
5442If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5443then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5444not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5445convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5446placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5447default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5448segment at all.
5449
5450@kindex FILEHDR
5451@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5452You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5453the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5454The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5455file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5456include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5457segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5458these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5459
5460The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5461value of the keyword.
5462
5463@table @asis
5464@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5465Indicates an unused program header.
5466
5467@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5468Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5469the file.
5470
5471@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5472Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5473
5474@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5475Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5476found.
5477
5478@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5479Indicates a segment holding note information.
5480
5481@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5482A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5483ABI.
5484
5485@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5486Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5487
1a9ccd70
NC
5488@item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5489Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5490
252b5132
RH
5491@item @var{expression}
5492An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5493be used for types not defined above.
5494@end table
5495
5496You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5497in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5498@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5499Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5500output section attribute.
5501
5502The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5503which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5504explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5505an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5506header.
5507
5508Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5509headers used on a native ELF system.
5510
5511@example
5512@group
5513PHDRS
5514@{
5515 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5516 interp PT_INTERP ;
5517 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5518 data PT_LOAD ;
5519 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5520@}
5521
5522SECTIONS
5523@{
5524 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5525 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5526 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5527 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5528 @dots{}
5529 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5530 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5531 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5532 @dots{}
5533@}
5534@end group
5535@end example
5536
5537@node VERSION
5538@section VERSION Command
5539@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5540@cindex symbol versions
5541@cindex version script
5542@cindex versions of symbols
5543The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5544only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5545symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5546a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5547shared library.
5548
5549You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5550you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5551also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5552
5553The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5554@smallexample
5555VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5556@end smallexample
5557
5558The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5559Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5560version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5561version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5562version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5563scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5564library.
5565
5566The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5567examples.
5568
5569@smallexample
5570VERS_1.1 @{
5571 global:
5572 foo1;
5573 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5574 old*;
5575 original*;
5576 new*;
252b5132
RH
5577@};
5578
5579VERS_1.2 @{
5580 foo2;
5581@} VERS_1.1;
5582
5583VERS_2.0 @{
5584 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5585 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5586 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5587 "f(int, double)";
5588 @};
252b5132
RH
5589@} VERS_1.2;
5590@end smallexample
5591
5592This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5593version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5594The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5595a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5596of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5597symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5598is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5599in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5600However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5601name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5602
5603Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5604depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5605to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5606
5607Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5608depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5609and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5610
5611When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5612specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5613unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5614unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5615somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5616wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5617wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5618set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5619ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5620
5621The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5622they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5623could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5624However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5625
0f6bf451 5626Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5627in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5628symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5629won't.
5630
5631@smallexample
7c9c73be 5632@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5633@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5634
252b5132
RH
5635When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5636symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5637requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5638shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5639loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5640linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5641application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5642way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5643all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5644search for each symbol reference.
5645
5646The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5647doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5648that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5649functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5650the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5651required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5652that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5653versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5654the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5655
5656There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5657first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5658source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5659script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5660maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5661@smallexample
5662__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5663@end smallexample
5664@noindent
5665in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5666be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5667The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5668@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5669takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5670
5671The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5672function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5673an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5674version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5675linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5676
5677To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5678source file. Here is an example:
5679
5680@smallexample
5681__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5682__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5683__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5684__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5685@end smallexample
5686
5687In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5688unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5689example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5690@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5691
5692When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5693some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5694this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5695@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5696declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5697you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5698
5699If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5700within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5701(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5702specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5703
cb840a31
L
5704You can also specify the language in the version script:
5705
5706@smallexample
5707VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5708@end smallexample
5709
c0065db7 5710The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5711The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5712demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5713patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5714@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5715
86043bbb
MM
5716Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5717described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5718or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5719the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5720whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5721cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5722might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5723should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5724expect when you upgrade.
5725
252b5132
RH
5726@node Expressions
5727@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5728@cindex expressions
5729@cindex arithmetic
5730The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5731that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5732expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5733host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5734
5735You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5736
5737The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5738expressions.
5739
5740@menu
5741* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5742* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5743* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5744* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5745* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5746* Operators:: Operators
5747* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5748* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5749* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5750@end menu
5751
5752@node Constants
5753@subsection Constants
5754@cindex integer notation
5755@cindex constants in linker scripts
5756All constants are integers.
5757
5758As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5759octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5760hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5761@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5762@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5763value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5764
5765@cindex scaled integers
5766@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5767@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5768@cindex suffixes for integers
5769@cindex integer suffixes
5770In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5771constant by
5772@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5773@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5774@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5775@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5776@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5777@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5778@tex
5779${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5780@end tex
5781@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5782respectively. For example, the following
5783all refer to the same quantity:
5784
252b5132 5785@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5786_fourk_1 = 4K;
5787_fourk_2 = 4096;
5788_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5789_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5790@end smallexample
5791
8a308ae8
NC
5792Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5793conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5794
0c71d759
NC
5795@node Symbolic Constants
5796@subsection Symbolic Constants
5797@cindex symbolic constants
5798@kindex CONSTANT
5799It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5800the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5801
5802@table @code
5803@item MAXPAGESIZE
5804@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5805The target's maximum page size.
5806
5807@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5808@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5809The target's default page size.
5810@end table
5811
5812So for example:
5813
5814@smallexample
9d5777a3 5815 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5816@end smallexample
5817
5818will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5819supported by the target.
5820
252b5132
RH
5821@node Symbols
5822@subsection Symbol Names
5823@cindex symbol names
5824@cindex names
5825@cindex quoted symbol names
5826@kindex "
5827Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5828and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5829Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5830specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5831keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5832@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5833"SECTION" = 9;
5834"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5835@end smallexample
5836
5837Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5838to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5839whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5840
ecca9871
L
5841@node Orphan Sections
5842@subsection Orphan Sections
5843@cindex orphan
5844Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5845are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5846script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
a87ded7b
AB
5847output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5848in which to place the orphaned input section.
5849
5850If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5851an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5852placed at the end of that output section.
5853
5854If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5855sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5856name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5857orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5858one new output section.
5859
5860If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5861then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
e299b355
AM
5862in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5863linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5864attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5865sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
5866support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
ecca9871 5867
c005eb9e
AB
5868The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5869(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5870output sections an orphan is placed in.
5871
252b5132
RH
5872@node Location Counter
5873@subsection The Location Counter
5874@kindex .
5875@cindex dot
5876@cindex location counter
5877@cindex current output location
5878The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5879current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5880location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5881within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5882anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5883
5884@cindex holes
5885Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5886moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5887location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5888and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5889doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5890
5891@smallexample
5892SECTIONS
5893@{
5894 output :
5895 @{
5896 file1(.text)
5897 . = . + 1000;
5898 file2(.text)
5899 . += 1000;
5900 file3(.text)
563e308f 5901 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5902@}
5903@end smallexample
5904@noindent
5905In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5906located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5907followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5908@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5909@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5910specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5911
5c6bbab8
NC
5912@cindex dot inside sections
5913Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5914current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5915statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5916absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5917however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5918not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5919
5920@smallexample
5921SECTIONS
5922@{
5923 . = 0x100
5924 .text: @{
5925 *(.text)
5926 . = 0x200
5927 @}
5928 . = 0x500
5929 .data: @{
5930 *(.data)
5931 . += 0x600
5932 @}
5933@}
5934@end smallexample
5935
5936The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5937and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5938the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5939much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5940move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5941and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5942the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5943the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5944
b5666f2f
AM
5945@cindex dot outside sections
5946Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5947output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5948needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5949
5950@smallexample
5951SECTIONS
5952@{
5953 start_of_text = . ;
5954 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5955 end_of_text = . ;
5956
5957 start_of_data = . ;
5958 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5959 end_of_data = . ;
5960@}
5961@end smallexample
5962
5963If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5964not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5965between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5966should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5967blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5968the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5969sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5970statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5971special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5972place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5973as follows:
5974
5975@smallexample
5976SECTIONS
5977@{
5978 start_of_text = . ;
5979 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5980 end_of_text = . ;
5981
5982 start_of_data = . ;
5983 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5984 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5985 end_of_data = . ;
5986@}
5987@end smallexample
5988
5989This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5990@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5991placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5992assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5993a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5994section. So you could write:
5995
5996@smallexample
5997SECTIONS
5998@{
5999 start_of_text = . ;
6000 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6001 end_of_text = . ;
6002
6003 . = . ;
6004 start_of_data = . ;
6005 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6006 end_of_data = . ;
6007@}
6008@end smallexample
6009
6010Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6011@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6012
252b5132
RH
6013@need 2000
6014@node Operators
6015@subsection Operators
6016@cindex operators for arithmetic
6017@cindex arithmetic operators
6018@cindex precedence in expressions
6019The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6020the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6021@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6022@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6023@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6024@smallexample
6025precedence associativity Operators Notes
6026(highest)
60271 left ! - ~ (1)
60282 left * / %
60293 left + -
60304 left >> <<
60315 left == != > < <= >=
60326 left &
60337 left |
60348 left &&
60359 left ||
603610 right ? :
603711 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6038(lowest)
6039@end smallexample
6040Notes:
a1ab1d2a 6041(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
6042(2) @xref{Assignments}.
6043@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6044@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6045@tex
6046\vskip \baselineskip
6047%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6048\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6049\hrule
6050\halign
6051{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6052height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6053&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6054height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6055\noalign{\hrule}
6056height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6057&highest&&&&&\cr
6058% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 6059&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
6060&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6061&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6062&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6063&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6064&6&&left&&\&&\cr
6065&7&&left&&|&\cr
6066&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6067&9&&left&&||&\cr
6068&10&&right&&? :&\cr
6069&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6070&lowest&&&&&\cr
6071height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6072\hrule}
6073@end tex
6074@iftex
6075{
6076@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6077@dag@quad Prefix operators.
6078@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6079}
6080@end iftex
6081@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6082
6083@node Evaluation
6084@subsection Evaluation
6085@cindex lazy evaluation
6086@cindex expression evaluation order
6087The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6088an expression when absolutely necessary.
6089
6090The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6091address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6092regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6093as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6094
6095However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6096until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6097other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6098for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6099
6100The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6101assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6102allocation.
6103
6104Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6105@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6106
6107If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6108available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6109following
6110@smallexample
6111@group
6112SECTIONS
6113 @{
a1ab1d2a 6114 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
6115 @{ *(.text) @}
6116 @}
6117@end group
6118@end smallexample
6119@noindent
6120will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6121address}.
6122
6123@node Expression Section
6124@subsection The Section of an Expression
6125@cindex expression sections
6126@cindex absolute expressions
6127@cindex relative expressions
6128@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6129@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6130@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
6131Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6132relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6133using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6134value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6135symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6136operations.
6137
abf4be64
AM
6138Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6139section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6140address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6141@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6142functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
6143One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6144(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
6145differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6146versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6147section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6148Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
6149absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6150given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6151everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
6152
6153In the following simple example,
252b5132 6154
7542af2a
AM
6155@smallexample
6156@group
6157SECTIONS
6158 @{
6159 . = 0x100;
6160 __executable_start = 0x100;
6161 .data :
6162 @{
6163 . = 0x10;
6164 __data_start = 0x10;
6165 *(.data)
6166 @}
6167 @dots{}
6168 @}
6169@end group
6170@end smallexample
252b5132 6171
7542af2a
AM
6172both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6173address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6174@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6175section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 6176
5c3049d2
AM
6177For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6178addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
6179
6180@itemize @bullet
6181@item
c05f749e
AM
6182Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6183operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6184absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6185@item
7542af2a
AM
6186Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6187relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6188and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6189@item
c05f749e
AM
6190Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6191in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6192address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6193before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
6194@end itemize
6195
6196The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6197
6198@itemize @bullet
6199@item
6200An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6201@item
6202The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6203@item
9bc8bb33 6204The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 6205relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
94b41882
AM
6206(after above conversions) is also a number when
6207@code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6208but an absolute address otherwise.
9bc8bb33
AM
6209@item
6210The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6211relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6212section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
6213@item
6214The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6215conversions) is an absolute address.
6216@end itemize
252b5132
RH
6217
6218You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6219to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6220create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6221section @samp{.data}:
6222@smallexample
6223SECTIONS
6224 @{
6225 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6226 @}
6227@end smallexample
6228@noindent
6229If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6230@samp{.data} section.
6231
7542af2a
AM
6232Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6233particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6234
252b5132
RH
6235@node Builtin Functions
6236@subsection Builtin Functions
6237@cindex functions in expressions
6238The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6239use in linker script expressions.
6240
6241@table @code
6242@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6243@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6244@cindex expression, absolute
6245Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6246of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6247value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6248normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6249
6250@item ADDR(@var{section})
6251@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6252@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 6253Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 6254script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
6255the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6256@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6257@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6258the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
6259@smallexample
6260@group
6261SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6262 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 6263 @{
252b5132
RH
6264 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6265 @dots{}
6266 @}
6267 .output :
6268 @{
6269 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6270 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6271 @}
6272@dots{} @}
6273@end group
6274@end smallexample
6275
876f4090
NS
6276@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6277@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6278@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6279@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
6280@cindex round up location counter
6281@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
6282@cindex round up expression
6283@cindex align expression
6284Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6285to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6286doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6287arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6288expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
e0a3af22 6289equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
876f4090
NS
6290
6291Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6292next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6293variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6294input sections:
252b5132
RH
6295@smallexample
6296@group
6297SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6298 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6299 *(.data)
6300 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6301 @}
6302@dots{} @}
6303@end group
6304@end smallexample
6305@noindent
6306The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6307a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6308a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6309of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6310
6311The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6312
362c1d1a
NS
6313@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6314@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6315@cindex section alignment
6316Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6317been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6318evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6319the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6320value in that section.
6321@smallexample
6322@group
6323SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6324 .output @{
6325 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6326 @dots{}
6327 @}
6328@dots{} @}
6329@end group
6330@end smallexample
6331
252b5132
RH
6332@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6333@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6334This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6335scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6336section.
6337
2d20f7bf
JJ
6338@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6339@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6340This is equivalent to either
6341@smallexample
6342(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6343@end smallexample
6344or
6345@smallexample
fe6052e1
AM
6346(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6347 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
2d20f7bf
JJ
6348@end smallexample
6349@noindent
6350depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6351for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6352@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6353If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6354memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6355bytes in the on-disk file.
6356
6357This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6358any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6359@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
def5c83c
AM
6360be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for while still
6361running on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}. Note however
6362that @samp{-z relro} protection will not be effective if the system
6363page size is larger than @var{commonpagesize}.
2d20f7bf
JJ
6364
6365@noindent
6366Example:
6367@smallexample
6368 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6369@end smallexample
6370
6371@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6372@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6373This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6374evaluation purposes.
6375
6376@smallexample
6377 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6378@end smallexample
6379
a4f5ad88
JJ
6380@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6381@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6382This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6383@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6384When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6385does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
def5c83c
AM
6386@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the @var{commonpagesize}
6387argument given to @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}. If present in the linker
6388script, it must be placed between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6389@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6390padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6391section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6392
6393@smallexample
6394 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6395@end smallexample
6396
252b5132
RH
6397@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6398@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6399@cindex symbol defaults
6400Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6401defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6402return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6403default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6404shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6405the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6406existed, its value is preserved:
6407
6408@smallexample
6409@group
6410SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6411 .text : @{
6412 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6413 @dots{}
6414 @}
6415 @dots{}
6416@}
6417@end group
6418@end smallexample
6419
3ec57632
NC
6420@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6421@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6422Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6423
252b5132
RH
6424@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6425@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6426@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6427Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6428Section LMA}).
6429
2e53f7d6
NC
6430@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6431@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6432Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6433@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6434
252b5132
RH
6435@kindex MAX
6436@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6437Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6438
6439@kindex MIN
6440@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6441Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6442
6443@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6444@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6445@cindex unallocated address, next
6446Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6447This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6448use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6449output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6450
3ec57632
NC
6451@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6452@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6453Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6454
ba916c8a
MM
6455@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6456@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6457Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6458value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6459@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6460will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6461can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6462``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6463name.
6464
252b5132
RH
6465@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6466@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6467@cindex section size
6468Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6469been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6470evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6471@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6472@smallexample
6473@group
6474SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6475 .output @{
6476 .start = . ;
6477 @dots{}
6478 .end = . ;
6479 @}
6480 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6481 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6482@dots{} @}
6483@end group
6484@end smallexample
6485
6486@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6487@itemx sizeof_headers
6488@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6489@cindex header size
6490Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6491information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6492this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6493choose, to facilitate paging.
6494
6495@cindex not enough room for program headers
6496@cindex program headers, not enough room
6497When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6498@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6499number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6500addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6501additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6502room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6503the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6504script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6505you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6506command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6507@end table
6508
6509@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6510@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6511@cindex implicit linker scripts
6512If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6513an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6514linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6515linker will report an error.
6516
6517An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6518
6519Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6520assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6521commands.
6522
6523Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6524at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6525read. This can affect archive searching.
6526
6527@ifset GENERIC
6528@node Machine Dependent
6529@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6530
6531@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6532@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6533sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6534functionality are not listed.
6535
6536@menu
36f63dca
NC
6537@ifset H8300
6538* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6539@end ifset
6540@ifset I960
6541* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6542@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6543@ifset M68HC11
6544* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6545@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6546@ifset ARM
6547* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6548@end ifset
6549@ifset HPPA
6550* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6551@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6552@ifset M68K
6553* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6554@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6555@ifset MIPS
6556* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6557@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6558@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6559* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6560@end ifset
2469cfa2 6561@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6562* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6563@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6564@ifset NDS32
6565* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6566@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6567@ifset NIOSII
6568* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6569@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6570@ifset POWERPC
6571* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6572@end ifset
6573@ifset POWERPC64
6574* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6575@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
6576@ifset S/390
6577* S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6578@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6579@ifset SPU
6580* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6581@end ifset
74459f0e 6582@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6583* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6584@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6585@ifset WIN32
6586* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6587@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6588@ifset XTENSA
6589* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6590@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6591@end menu
6592@end ifset
6593
252b5132
RH
6594@ifset H8300
6595@ifclear GENERIC
6596@raisesections
6597@end ifclear
6598
6599@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6600@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6601
6602@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6603For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6604you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6605
6606@table @emph
6607@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6608@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6609@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6610targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6611program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6612respectively.
6613
6614@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6615@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6616@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6617@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6618sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6619page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6620(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6621@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6622top page of memory).
1502569c 6623
81f5558e
NC
6624@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6625indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6626displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6627the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6628@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6629whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6630range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6631
1502569c 6632@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6633@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6634biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6635which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6636page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6637(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6638@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6639the top page of memory).
6640
6641@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6642@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
664332 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6644changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6645(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6646@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6647the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6648@end table
6649
6650@ifclear GENERIC
6651@lowersections
6652@end ifclear
6653@end ifset
6654
36f63dca 6655@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6656@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6657@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6658@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6659@node Renesas
6660@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6661
c2dcd04e
NC
6662@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6663H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6664options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6665@end ifset
6666@end ifclear
6667
6668@ifset I960
6669@ifclear GENERIC
6670@raisesections
6671@end ifclear
6672
6673@node i960
6674@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6675
6676@cindex i960 support
6677
6678You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6679specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6680family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6681incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6682linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6683libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6684search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6685
6686For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6687well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6688paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6689the names
6690
6691@smallexample
6692@group
6693try
6694libtry.a
6695tryca
6696libtryca.a
6697@end group
6698@end smallexample
6699
6700@noindent
6701The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6702two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6703
6704You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6705the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6706use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6707specifies a library.
6708
6709@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6710@cindex relaxing on i960
6711@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6712you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6713@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6714them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6715instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6716instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6717target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6718not itself call any subroutines).
6719
6720@ifclear GENERIC
6721@lowersections
6722@end ifclear
6723@end ifset
6724
6725@ifset ARM
6726@ifclear GENERIC
6727@raisesections
6728@end ifclear
6729
93fd0973
SC
6730@ifset M68HC11
6731@ifclear GENERIC
6732@raisesections
6733@end ifclear
6734
6735@node M68HC11/68HC12
6736@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6737
6738@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6739
6740@subsection Linker Relaxation
6741
6742For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6743optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6744
6745@table @emph
6746@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6747@item relaxing address modes
6748@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6749targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6750program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6751respectively.
6752
6753@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6754transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6755page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6756
6757@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6758When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6759of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6760addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6761@code{bset} instructions.
6762
6763@end table
6764
6765@subsection Trampoline Generation
6766
6767@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6768@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6769For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6770call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6771will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6772trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6773case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6774point to the function trampoline.
6775
6776@ifclear GENERIC
6777@lowersections
6778@end ifclear
6779@end ifset
6780
36f63dca 6781@node ARM
3674e28a 6782@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6783
6784@cindex ARM interworking support
6785@kindex --support-old-code
6786For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6787between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6788been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6789line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6790libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6791option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6792given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6793which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6794the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6795non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6796
6797@cindex thumb entry point
6798@cindex entry point, thumb
6799@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6800The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6801@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6802But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6803branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6804executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6805
ce11ba6c
KT
6806@cindex PE import table prefixing
6807@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6808The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6809the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6810element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6811import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6812
e489d0ae
PB
6813@cindex BE8
6814@kindex --be8
6815The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
6816executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6817objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6818option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6819little-endian code.
e489d0ae 6820
3674e28a
PB
6821@cindex TARGET1
6822@kindex --target1-rel
6823@kindex --target1-abs
6824The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6825@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6826or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6827and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6828
6829@cindex TARGET2
6830@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6831The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6832@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6833meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6834@table @samp
6835@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6836@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6837@item abs
6838@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6839@item got-rel
6840@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6841@end table
6842
319850b4
JB
6843@cindex FIX_V4BX
6844@kindex --fix-v4bx
6845The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6846specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6847interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6848also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6849
6850In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6851linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6852@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6853
6854In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6855relocations are ignored.
6856
845b51d6
PB
6857@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6858@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6859Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6860relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6861
6862@smallexample
6863TST rM, #1
6864MOVEQ PC, rM
6865BX Rn
6866@end smallexample
6867
6868This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6869and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6870condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6871
33bfe774
JB
6872@cindex USE_BLX
6873@kindex --use-blx
6874The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6875BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6876situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6877code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6878each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6879
6880This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6881specify it if you are using that target.
6882
c6dd86c6
JB
6883@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6884@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6885The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6886bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6887instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6888to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6889the support code can read the intended values.
6890
6891The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6892intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6893and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6894intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6895full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6896you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6897
6898If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6899enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6900@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6901mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6902vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6903@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6904
6905If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6906potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6907such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6908first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6909instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6910the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6911are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6912
2de70689
MGD
6913@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6914@kindex --fix-arm1176
6915@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6916The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6917in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6918are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6919unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6920
9d5777a3 6921Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6922Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6923http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6924
a504d23a
LA
6925@cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6926@kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6927
6928The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6929workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6930the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6931off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6932the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6933core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6934integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6935VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6936
6937The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6938necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6939
6940The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6941@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6942STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6943linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6944@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6945
6946If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6947potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6948such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6949replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6950branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6951then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6952
6953The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6954the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6955
6956The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6957they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6958there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6959occurs.
6960
6961The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6962PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6963large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6964cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6965occurs.
6966
bf21ed78
MS
6967@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6968@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6969The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6970warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6971enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6972linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6973using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6974not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6975
6976@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6977@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6978The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6979warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6980@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6981linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6982using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6983
726150b7
NC
6984@cindex PIC_VENEER
6985@kindex --pic-veneer
6986The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6987ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6988is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6989@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6990
6991@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6992@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6993The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6994code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6995perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6996placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6997controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6998The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6999duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
7000group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
7001code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
7002where they should be placed.
7003
7004The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
7005@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 7006placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
7007branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
7008placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
7009value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
7010exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
7011A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
7012linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
7013from the input sections.
7014
7015The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
7016@samp{N = +1}.
7017
1a51c1a4
NC
7018Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
7019only, because it relies on object files properties not present
7020otherwise.
7021
1db37fe6
YG
7022@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7023@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7024@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7025The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7026
7027The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7028
68fcca92
JW
7029@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7030@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7031@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7032The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7033
7034Please contact ARM for further details.
7035
1db37fe6
YG
7036@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7037@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7038@cindex Merging exidx entries
7039The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7040
7041@kindex --long-plt
7042@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7043The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7044which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7045entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7046
1f56df9d
JW
7047@kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7048@cindex AArch64 rela addend
7049The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7050link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7051
4ba2ef8f
TP
7052@cindex Placement of SG veneers
7053All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
7054Its start address must be set, either with the command line option
7055@samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7056veneers in memory.
7057
54ddd295
TP
7058@kindex --cmse-implib
7059@cindex Secure gateway import library
7060The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7061specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7062secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7063executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7064
0955507f
TP
7065@kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7066@cindex Input import library
7067The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7068must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7069given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7070in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7071@samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7072library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7073library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7074for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7075specified.
7076
36f63dca
NC
7077@ifclear GENERIC
7078@lowersections
7079@end ifclear
7080@end ifset
7081
7082@ifset HPPA
7083@ifclear GENERIC
7084@raisesections
7085@end ifclear
7086
7087@node HPPA ELF32
7088@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7089@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7090@kindex --multi-subspace
7091When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7092import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7093The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7094stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7095multiple sub-spaces.
7096
7097@cindex HPPA stub grouping
7098@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7099Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7100stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7101@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7102sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7103a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7104the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7105conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7106prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7107A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7108branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7109@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7110@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7111detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7112positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7113
7114Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7115single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7116create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7117large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7118
7119@ifclear GENERIC
7120@lowersections
7121@end ifclear
7122@end ifset
7123
7fb9f789
NC
7124@ifset M68K
7125@ifclear GENERIC
7126@raisesections
7127@end ifclear
7128
7129@node M68K
7130@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7131
7132@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7133@kindex --got=@var{type}
7134The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7135The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7136@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7137the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7138@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7139entries only at non-negative offsets.
7140@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7141entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7142support such GOTs.
7143@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7144output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7145file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7146files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7147
7148@ifclear GENERIC
7149@lowersections
7150@end ifclear
7151@end ifset
7152
833794fc
MR
7153@ifset MIPS
7154@ifclear GENERIC
7155@raisesections
7156@end ifclear
7157
7158@node MIPS
7159@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7160
7161@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7162@kindex --insn32
7163@kindex --no-insn32
7164The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7165microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7166in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7167used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7168or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7169including 16-bit ones where possible.
7170
8b10b0b3
MR
7171@cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7172@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7173@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7174The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7175control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7176@samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7177relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7178calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7179relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7180instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7181or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7182the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7183
833794fc
MR
7184@ifclear GENERIC
7185@lowersections
7186@end ifclear
7187@end ifset
7188
36f63dca
NC
7189@ifset MMIX
7190@ifclear GENERIC
7191@raisesections
7192@end ifclear
7193
7194@node MMIX
7195@section @code{ld} and MMIX
7196For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7197@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7198understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7199can translate between the two formats.
7200
7201There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7202Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7203registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7204equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7205@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7206global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7207this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7208symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7209
7a2de473
HPN
7210Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7211@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7212The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7213of a section.
36f63dca
NC
7214
7215Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7216are left out from an mmo file.
7217
7218@ifclear GENERIC
7219@lowersections
7220@end ifclear
7221@end ifset
7222
7223@ifset MSP430
7224@ifclear GENERIC
7225@raisesections
7226@end ifclear
7227
7228@node MSP430
7229@section @code{ld} and MSP430
7230For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7231will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7232just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7233
7234@cindex MSP430 extra sections
7235The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7236
7237@table @code
7238@item @samp{.vectors}
7239Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7240
7241@item @samp{.bootloader}
7242Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7243in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7244
7245@item @samp{.infomem}
7246Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7247this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7248
c0065db7 7249@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
7250This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7251in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7252
7253@item @samp{.noinit}
7254Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7255
c0065db7 7256The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
7257@end table
7258
7ef3addb
JL
7259@table @option
7260@cindex MSP430 Options
7261@kindex --code-region
7262@item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7263This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
7264argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
7265using this option.
7266
7267@kindex --data-region
7268@item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7269This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
7270[either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
7271for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
7272
7273@kindex --disable-sec-transformation
7274@item --disable-sec-transformation
7275Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
7276and @code{--data-region} options.
7277This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
7278wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
7279not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
7280@end table
7281
36f63dca
NC
7282@ifclear GENERIC
7283@lowersections
7284@end ifclear
7285@end ifset
7286
35c08157
KLC
7287@ifset NDS32
7288@ifclear GENERIC
7289@raisesections
7290@end ifclear
7291
7292@node NDS32
7293@section @code{ld} and NDS32
7294@kindex relaxing on NDS32
7295For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7296relaxes objects according to these options.
7297
7298@table @code
7299@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7300Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7301
7302@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7303Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7304
7305@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7306Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7307
7308@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7309Export the EX9 table after linking.
7310
7311@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7312Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7313
7314@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7315Update the existing EX9 table.
7316
7317@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7318Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7319
7320@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7321Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7322
7323@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7324Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7325
7326@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7327Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7328@end table
7329
7330@ifclear GENERIC
7331@lowersections
7332@end ifclear
7333@end ifset
7334
78058a5e
SL
7335@ifset NIOSII
7336@ifclear GENERIC
7337@raisesections
7338@end ifclear
7339
7340@node Nios II
7341@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7342@cindex Nios II call relaxation
7343@kindex --relax on Nios II
7344
7345Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7346transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7347which may result in @command{ld} giving
7348@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7349The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7350trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7351outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7352trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7353be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7354larger than 256MB.
7355
7356The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7357is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7358@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7359locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7360source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7361register as a temporary.
7362
7363Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7364relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7365option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7366
7367@ifclear GENERIC
7368@lowersections
7369@end ifclear
7370@end ifset
7371
2a60a7a8
AM
7372@ifset POWERPC
7373@ifclear GENERIC
7374@raisesections
7375@end ifclear
7376
7377@node PowerPC ELF32
7378@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7379@cindex PowerPC long branches
7380@kindex --relax on PowerPC
7381Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7382displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7383@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7384@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7385the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7386section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
7387section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7388@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7389both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7390considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
7391
7392@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7393@table @option
7394@cindex PowerPC PLT
7395@kindex --bss-plt
7396@item --bss-plt
7397Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7398generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7399the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7400writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7401@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7402PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7403compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7404BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7405
016687f8
AM
7406@kindex --secure-plt
7407@item --secure-plt
7408@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7409@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7410when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7411layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7412style BSS PLT.
7413
2a60a7a8
AM
7414@cindex PowerPC GOT
7415@kindex --sdata-got
7416@item --sdata-got
7417The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7418sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7419@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7420section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7421@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7422@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7423@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7424@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7425PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7426pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7427GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7428really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7429
7430@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7431@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7432@item --emit-stub-syms
7433This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7434symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7435
7436@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7437@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7438@item --no-tls-optimize
7439PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7440sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7441disable the optimization.
7442@end table
7443
7444@ifclear GENERIC
7445@lowersections
7446@end ifclear
7447@end ifset
7448
7449@ifset POWERPC64
7450@ifclear GENERIC
7451@raisesections
7452@end ifclear
7453
7454@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7455@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7456
7457@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7458@table @option
7459@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7460@kindex --stub-group-size
7461@item --stub-group-size
7462Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7463by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7464@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7465sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7466a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7467the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7468conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7469prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7470A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7471branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7472@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7473@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7474detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7475positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7476
7477Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7478single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7479create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7480large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7481
7482@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7483@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7484@item --emit-stub-syms
7485This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7486symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7487
7488@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7489@kindex --dotsyms
7490@kindex --no-dotsyms
95421fb9
AM
7491@item --dotsyms
7492@itemx --no-dotsyms
2a60a7a8
AM
7493These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7494in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7495function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7496code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7497properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7498to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7499@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7500dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7501feature.
7502
7ae4ea7d
AM
7503@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7504@kindex --save-restore-funcs
7505@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
95421fb9
AM
7506@item --save-restore-funcs
7507@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7ae4ea7d
AM
7508These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7509provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7510@samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7511function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7512link.
7513
2a60a7a8
AM
7514@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7515@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7516@item --no-tls-optimize
7517PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7518sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7519disable the optimization.
7520
7c9cf415
AM
7521@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7522@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7523@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
95421fb9
AM
7524@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7525@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7c9cf415
AM
7526These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7527stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7528an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7529@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7530stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7531option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7532Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7533slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7534application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7535normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7536
2a60a7a8
AM
7537@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7538@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7539@item --no-opd-optimize
7540PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7541corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7542the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7543Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7544
7545@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7546@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7547@item --non-overlapping-opd
7548Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7549@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7550the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7551entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7552
7553@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7554@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7555@item --no-toc-optimize
7556PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7557entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7558reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7559marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7560marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7561relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7562unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7563reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7564discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7565reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7566code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7567optimization.
7568
7569@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7570@kindex --no-multi-toc
7571@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7572If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7573@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7574where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7575entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7576total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7577grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7578TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7579calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7580help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
758164K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7582Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7583
7584@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7585@kindex --no-toc-sort
7586@item --no-toc-sort
7587By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7588happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7589placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7590with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7591referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7592@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7593results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7594off this feature.
7595
7596@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7597@kindex --plt-align
7598@kindex --no-plt-align
7599@item --plt-align
7600@itemx --no-plt-align
7601Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
2420fff6
AM
7602aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7603boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. A negative value may be
7604specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
7605specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of boundaries
7606if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a boundary). By default
7607PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte boundaries.
794e51c0
AM
7608
7609@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7610@kindex --plt-static-chain
7611@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7612@item --plt-static-chain
7613@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7614Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7615chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7616chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7617
7618@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7619@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7620@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7621@item --plt-thread-safe
7622@itemx --no-thread-safe
7623With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7624lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7625another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7626order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7627memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7628barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7629looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7630seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7631default behaviour.
8b5f1ed8
AM
7632
7633@cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
7634@kindex --plt-localentry
7635@kindex --no-plt-localentry
7636@item --plt-localentry
7637@itemx --no-localentry
7638ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
7639ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
7640(the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
7641Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
7642or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
7643functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
7644in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
d44c746a
AM
7645interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
7646including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
7647to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
7648complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
7649care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
2a60a7a8
AM
7650@end table
7651
7652@ifclear GENERIC
7653@lowersections
7654@end ifclear
7655@end ifset
7656
b4cbbe8f
AK
7657@ifset S/390
7658@ifclear GENERIC
7659@raisesections
7660@end ifclear
7661
7662@node S/390 ELF
7663@section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7664
7665@cindex S/390 ELF options
7666@table @option
7667
7668@cindex S/390
7669@kindex --s390-pgste
7670@item --s390-pgste
7671This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7672segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7673binaries marked that way.
7674@end table
7675
7676@ifclear GENERIC
7677@lowersections
7678@end ifclear
7679@end ifset
7680
49fa1e15
AM
7681@ifset SPU
7682@ifclear GENERIC
7683@raisesections
7684@end ifclear
7685
7686@node SPU ELF
7687@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7688
7689@cindex SPU ELF options
7690@table @option
7691
7692@cindex SPU plugins
7693@kindex --plugin
7694@item --plugin
7695This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7696
7697@cindex SPU overlays
7698@kindex --no-overlays
7699@item --no-overlays
7700Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7701regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7702@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7703turns off all this special overlay handling.
7704
7705@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7706@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7707@item --emit-stub-syms
7708This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7709symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7710
7711@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7712@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7713@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7714This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7715function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7716on calls to non-overlay regions.
7717
7718@cindex SPU local store size
7719@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7720@item --local-store=lo:hi
7721@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7722the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7723range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7724
c0065db7 7725@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7726@kindex --stack-analysis
7727@item --stack-analysis
7728SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7729unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7730under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7731@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7732@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7733determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7734for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7735for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7736for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7737find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7738and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7739under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7740dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7741is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7742and calls will be given.
7743
c0065db7 7744@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7745@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7746@item --emit-stack-syms
7747This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7748in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7749These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7750functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7751functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7752such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7753The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7754@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7755@end table
7756
7757@ifclear GENERIC
7758@lowersections
7759@end ifclear
7760@end ifset
7761
36f63dca
NC
7762@ifset TICOFF
7763@ifclear GENERIC
7764@raisesections
7765@end ifclear
7766
7767@node TI COFF
7768@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7769@cindex TI COFF versions
7770@kindex --format=@var{version}
7771The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7772TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7773also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7774format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7775header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7776
7777@ifclear GENERIC
7778@lowersections
7779@end ifclear
7780@end ifset
7781
2ca22b03
NC
7782@ifset WIN32
7783@ifclear GENERIC
7784@raisesections
7785@end ifclear
7786
7787@node WIN32
7788@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7789
c0065db7 7790This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 7791See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 7792command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7793
7794@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7795@cindex import libraries
7796@item import libraries
69da35b5 7797The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7798libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7799regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7800archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
7801support for creating such libraries provided with the
7802@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7803
c0065db7
RM
7804@item exporting DLL symbols
7805@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7806The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7807
7808@table @emph
7809@item using auto-export functionality
7810@cindex using auto-export functionality
7811By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7812which is controlled by the following command line options:
7813
0a5d968e
NC
7814@itemize
7815@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7816@item --exclude-symbols
7817@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7818@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7819@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7820@end itemize
7821
09e2aba4
DK
7822When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7823(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7824symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7825often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7826private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7827options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7828exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7829final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7830
7831If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7832command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7833if either of the following are true:
7834
7835@itemize
7836@item A DEF file is used.
7837@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7838@end itemize
dc8465bf 7839
c0065db7
RM
7840@item using a DEF file
7841@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7842Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7843an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7844exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7845name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7846command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7847
7848@example
7849gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7850@end example
7851
0a5d968e
NC
7852Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7853@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7854
dc8465bf
NC
7855Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7856
7857@example
4b5bd4e7 7858LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7859
7860EXPORTS
7861foo
7862bar
7863_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7864another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7865var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7866doo = foo == foo2
7867eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7868@end example
dc8465bf 7869
7fcab871 7870This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7871symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7872alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7873by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7874@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7875@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7876export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7877in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7878symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7879
6b31ad16
DS
7880The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7881name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7882the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7883
b45619c0
NC
7884When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7885library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7886@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7887executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7888
7889With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7890specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7891non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7892
7893If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7894or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7895filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7896
4b5bd4e7
DS
7897The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7898
7899@example
7900EXPORTS
7901 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7902 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7903 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7904@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7905
7906Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7907@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7908@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7909@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7910Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7911@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7912string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7913
7914The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7915
7916@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7917will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7918by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7919linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7920library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7921
7922@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7923The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7924the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7925@code{*_imp__foo}).
7926
7927@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7928well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7929read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7930variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7931the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7932extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7933application will behave unexpectedly.
7934
7935@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7936it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7937symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
de194d85 7938API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
4b5bd4e7 7939the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7940
4b5bd4e7
DS
7941See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7942other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7943
7944@cindex creating a DEF file
7945While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7946with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7947
7948@item Using decorations
7949@cindex Using decorations
7950Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7951itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7952declared as:
7953
7954@example
7955__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7956__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7957@end example
7958
7959All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7960any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7961this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7962the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7963
7964Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7965decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7966instead:
7967
7968@example
7969__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7970__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7971@end example
7972
c0065db7
RM
7973This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7974when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7975variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7976code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7977of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7978omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7979@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7980information.
c0065db7 7981@end table
dc8465bf 7982
2ca22b03
NC
7983@cindex automatic data imports
7984@item automatic data imports
7985The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7986by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7987compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7988issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7989code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7990c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7991initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7992decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7993platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7994command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7995The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7996suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7997trigger the feature's use.
7998
c0065db7 7999auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
8000additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
8001
c0065db7 8002"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
8003documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
8004
c0065db7
RM
8005The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
8006occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
8007One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
8008below.
8009
8010@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
8011For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
8012object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
8013offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
8014field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
8015in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 8016without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 8017The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
8018references.
8019
c0065db7
RM
8020The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
8021be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
8022themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
8023runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
8024compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
8025support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
8026run without error on an older system.
8027
c0065db7
RM
8028@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
8029enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
8030
8031@cindex direct linking to a dll
8032@item direct linking to a dll
8033The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
8034including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 8035libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 8036traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
8037libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
8038function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
8039though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 8040storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 8041tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
8042large or complex libraries when using import libs.
8043
c0065db7 8044Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 8045@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 8046of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
8047perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
8048select the dll instead of an import library.
8049
2ca22b03 8050
69da35b5
NC
8051For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
8052to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
8053
8054@example
45e948fe
NC
8055libxxx.dll.a
8056xxx.dll.a
8057libxxx.a
8058xxx.lib
69da35b5 8059cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
8060libxxx.dll
8061xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
8062@end example
8063
69da35b5
NC
8064before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8065
c0065db7
RM
8066(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8067where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8068@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8069file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
8070@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8071
c0065db7
RM
8072Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8073@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
8074was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8075various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8076could coexist on the same machine.
8077
2ca22b03
NC
8078The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8079applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 8080libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
8081
8082@example
8083bin/
8084 cygxxx.dll
8085lib/
8086 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 8087 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
8088@end example
8089
c0065db7
RM
8090Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8091done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
8092
80931. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8094@example
8095gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8096@end example
2ca22b03 8097
69da35b5
NC
8098However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8099(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8100@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8101not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8102
2ca22b03
NC
81032. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8104directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8105should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8106making the app/dll.
8107
8108@example
8109ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 8110@end example
2ca22b03
NC
8111
8112Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8113
8114@example
8115gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8116@end example
69da35b5
NC
8117
8118This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8119perfectly legal
8120
8121@example
8122bin/
8123 cygxxx-5.dll
8124lib/
c0065db7 8125 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
8126@end example
8127
dc8465bf 8128Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
8129even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8130@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8131
8132Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 8133wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
8134
81351. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8136work with auto-imported data.
8137
dc8465bf
NC
81382. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8139import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8140symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8141for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8142possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 8143
45e948fe
NC
81443. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8145critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8146in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8147stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8148
69da35b5 8149So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
8150true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8151a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8152binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
8153massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8154requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8155will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 8156
c0065db7 8157@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 8158@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
8159@item adding additional names
8160Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
8161A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8162exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8163when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 8164import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 8165
c0065db7 8166@example
dc8465bf
NC
8167LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8168
8169EXPORTS
c0065db7 8170foo
dc8465bf 8171_foo = foo
c0065db7 8172@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8173
8174The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8175
8176Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8177source code using the "weak" attribute:
8178
c0065db7
RM
8179@example
8180void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 8181void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 8182@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8183
8184See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8185symbols.
8186
8187@item renaming symbols
8188Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 8189kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
8190@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8191DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 8192created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 8193
c0065db7 8194@example
dc8465bf
NC
8195LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8196
8197EXPORTS
8198_foo = foo
c0065db7 8199@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8200
8201The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8202@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 8203@end table
dc8465bf 8204
0a5d968e 8205Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 8206unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 8207If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
8208@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8209that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8210@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8211renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8212to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8213the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8214In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 8215which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
8216
8217@cindex weak externals
8218@item weak externals
8219The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8220weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8221defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8222are three variants of weak externals:
8223@itemize
8224@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8225called lazy externals.
8226@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8227This form is not presently implemented.
8228@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8229implemented.
8230@end itemize
8231As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8232are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8233uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
8234
8235@cindex aligned common symbols
8236@item aligned common symbols
8237As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8238desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8239the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8240carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8241by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8242tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8243but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8244warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 8245
2ca22b03
NC
8246@end table
8247
8248@ifclear GENERIC
8249@lowersections
8250@end ifclear
8251@end ifset
8252
e0001a05
NC
8253@ifset XTENSA
8254@ifclear GENERIC
8255@raisesections
8256@end ifclear
8257
8258@node Xtensa
8259@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8260
8261@cindex Xtensa processors
8262The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8263@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8264specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8265keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8266example, with the command:
8267
8268@smallexample
8269SECTIONS
8270@{
8271 .text : @{
8272 *(.literal .text)
8273 @}
8274@}
8275@end smallexample
8276
8277@noindent
8278@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8279and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8280literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8281interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8282group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8283files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8284and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 8285
43cd72b9 8286@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 8287@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
8288Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8289provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8290is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8291literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8292will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8293location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8294the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8295unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8296@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8297range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8298
8299For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8300to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8301instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8302instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8303instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8304@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8305hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8306By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8307switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8308density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8309instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8310performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8311linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8312a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8313
8314The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8315control the linker:
8316
8317@cindex Xtensa options
8318@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
8319@item --size-opt
8320When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8321more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8322no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8323alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8324preserve the correctness of the code.
8325@end table
e0001a05
NC
8326
8327@ifclear GENERIC
8328@lowersections
8329@end ifclear
8330@end ifset
8331
252b5132
RH
8332@ifclear SingleFormat
8333@node BFD
8334@chapter BFD
8335
8336@cindex back end
8337@cindex object file management
8338@cindex object formats available
8339@kindex objdump -i
8340The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8341These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8342object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8343format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8344it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8345associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8346object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8347(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8348list all the formats available for your configuration.
8349
8350@cindex BFD requirements
8351@cindex requirements for BFD
8352As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8353several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8354BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8355formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8356been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8357BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8358may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8359
8360One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8361mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8362useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8363conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8364
8365@menu
8366* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8367@end menu
8368
8369@node BFD outline
36f63dca 8370@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
8371@cindex opening object files
8372@include bfdsumm.texi
8373@end ifclear
8374
8375@node Reporting Bugs
8376@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
8377@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8378@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 8379
ff5dcc92 8380Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
8381
8382Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8383it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 8384to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 8385work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 8386@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8387
8388In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8389information that enables us to fix the bug.
8390
8391@menu
8392* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8393* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8394@end menu
8395
8396@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 8397@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
8398@cindex bug criteria
8399
8400If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8401
8402@itemize @bullet
8403@cindex fatal signal
8404@cindex linker crash
8405@cindex crash of linker
8406@item
8407If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 8408@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
8409
8410@cindex error on valid input
8411@item
ff5dcc92 8412If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
8413
8414@cindex invalid input
8415@item
ff5dcc92 8416If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
8417may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8418object files are correct.
8419
8420@item
8421If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 8422improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
8423@end itemize
8424
8425@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 8426@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 8427@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 8428@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
8429
8430A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 8431products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
8432recommend you contact that organization first.
8433
8434You can find contact information for many support companies and
8435individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8436distribution.
8437
ad22bfe8 8438@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 8439Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
8440@value{BUGURL}.
8441@end ifset
252b5132
RH
8442
8443The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8444@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8445fact or leave it out, state it!
8446
8447Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8448problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
8449assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8450matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8451the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8452location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8453were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8454into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8455specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 8456and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
8457
8458Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8459the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8460on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
8461
8462Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
8463bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8464respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8465You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
8466
8467To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8468
8469@itemize @bullet
8470@item
ff5dcc92 8471The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
8472the @samp{--version} argument.
8473
8474Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 8475the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8476
8477@item
ff5dcc92 8478Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
8479patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8480
8481@item
8482The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8483version number.
8484
8485@item
ff5dcc92 8486What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
8487``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8488
8489@item
8490The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8491observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8492list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8493sufficient.
8494
8495If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8496and then we might not encounter the bug.
8497
8498@item
8499A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8500bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8501provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8502bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8503state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8504requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8505we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8506attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8507
8508If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8509@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8510object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8511@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8512how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8513
8514@item
8515A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8516incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8517
ff5dcc92 8518Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8519will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8520not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8521a chance to make a mistake.
8522
8523Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8524say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8525copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8526C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8527and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8528fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8529you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8530any conclusion from our observations.
8531
8532@item
ff5dcc92 8533If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8534diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8535@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8536If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8537context, not by line number.
8538
8539The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8540sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8541@end itemize
8542
8543Here are some things that are not necessary:
8544
8545@itemize @bullet
8546@item
8547A description of the envelope of the bug.
8548
8549Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8550which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8551changes will not affect it.
8552
8553This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8554will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8555with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8556We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8557
8558Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8559of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8560output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8561less time, and so on.
8562
8563However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8564report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8565
8566@item
8567A patch for the bug.
8568
8569A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8570the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8571a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8572to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8573
ff5dcc92 8574Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8575construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8576through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8577able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8578fixed.
8579
8580And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8581patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8582help us to understand.
8583
8584@item
8585A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8586
8587Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8588things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8589@end itemize
8590
8591@node MRI
8592@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8593@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8594To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8595linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8596alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8597described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8598simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8599@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8600linker commands; these commands are described here.
8601
8602In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8603file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8604features to make use of them.
8605
8606You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8607@samp{-c} command-line option.
8608
8609Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8610command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8611blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8612MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8613issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8614
8615Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8616
8617You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8618lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8619The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8620
8621@table @code
8622@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8623@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8624@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8625Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8626the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8627@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8628your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8629script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8630commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8631input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8632@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8633
8634@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8635@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8636Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8637in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8638
8639@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8640
8641@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8642@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8643Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8644@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8645
8646@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8647@item BASE @var{expression}
8648Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8649absolute addresses) in the output file.
8650
8651@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8652@item CHIP @var{expression}
8653@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8654This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8655
8656@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8657@item END
8658This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8659
8660@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8661@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8662Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 8663language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
8664
8665@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 8666@item
252b5132
RH
8667S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8668
8669@item
8670IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8671
8672@item
8673COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8674@samp{COFF}
8675@end enumerate
8676
8677@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8678@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8679Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8680@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8681
8682The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8683same line, with no change in its effect.
8684
8685@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8686@item LOAD @var{filename}
8687@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8688Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8689same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8690command line.
8691
8692@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8693@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8694@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8695MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8696option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8697
8698@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8699@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8700@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8701Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8702order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8703script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8704sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8705file, in the order specified.
8706
8707@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8708@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8709@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8710@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8711Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8712@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8713
8714@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8715@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8716@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8717@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8718You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8719specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8720If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8721@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8722@end table
8723
793c5807
NC
8724@node GNU Free Documentation License
8725@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8726@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8727
370b66a1
CD
8728@node LD Index
8729@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8730
8731@printindex cp
8732
8733@tex
7ca01ed9 8734% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8735% meantime:
8736\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8737\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8738\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8739\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8740\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8741\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8742\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8743\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8744\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8745% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8746@end tex
8747
252b5132 8748@bye